V7.

cover

Front cover

Power Systems for AIX I:

LPAR Configuration and
Planning

(Course code AN11)

Student Notebook
ERC 3.0
Student Notebook

Trademarks
The reader should recognize that the following terms, which appear in the content of this
training document, are official trademarks of IBM or other companies:
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
The following are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United
States, or other countries, or both:
Active Memory AIX 6 AIX
BladeCenter developerWorks EnergyScale
IBM Systems Director Active
Express Focal Point
Energy Manager
OS/400 POWER Hypervisor Power Systems
Power Systems Software Power PowerHA
PowerPC PowerVM POWER6+
POWER6 POWER7 Redbooks
Resource Link System i System p
System p5 System z
Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the
United States and other countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or
both.
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other
countries, or both.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other
countries.
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Oracle and/or its affiliates.
Other product and service names might be trademarks of IBM or other companies.

May 2012 edition

The information contained in this document has not been submitted to any formal IBM test and is distributed on an as is basis without
any warranty either express or implied. The use of this information or the implementation of any of these techniques is a customer
responsibility and depends on the customers ability to evaluate and integrate them into the customers operational environment. While
each item may have been reviewed by IBM for accuracy in a specific situation, there is no guarantee that the same or similar results will
result elsewhere. Customers attempting to adapt these techniques to their own environments do so at their own risk.

Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2009, 2012.

This document may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the prior written permission of IBM.
Note to U.S. Government Users Documentation related to restricted rights Use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions
set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
V7.0
Student Notebook

TOC Contents
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi

Course description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii

Agenda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
What is a partition? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Physical partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Logical partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Partition characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Partition resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
LPAR resource example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
IBM POWER6 LPAR-capable systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
IBM POWER7 LPAR-capable systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Benefits of using partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Software licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
POWER Hypervisor functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Hardware Management Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
The big picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Advanced partition features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Dynamic partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
How DLPAR works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Processor concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Micro-partitioning: Shared processor pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Multiple shared processor pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Virtual I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Virtual I/O example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Integrated Virtual Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
IVE example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Active Memory Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Live Partition Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Capacity on demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
PowerVM editions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Partitioning concepts: Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Integrated Virtualization Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
LPAR configuration process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
LPAR references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
AN11 course content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
Checkpoint (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
Checkpoint (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
Checkpoint (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
Exercise: Introduction to partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Contents iii

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-51

Unit 2. Hardware system overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
IBM POWER6 processor-based systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
POWER7 system highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
POWER7 processor chip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
POWER7 modes: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
POWER7 modes for AIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
POWER7 TurboCore mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
EnergyScale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
POWER7 offerings: Express versus Enterprise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Power Blade Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Power Blade Express at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Power 710 and 730 Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Power 710 Express at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Power 730 Express at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Power 710 / 730 Express: Rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Power 720 / 740 Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Power 720 Express at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Power 740 Express at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Power 740 Express: Rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Power 750 Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Power 750 Express at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Power 750 Express: Front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Power 750: Rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Power 750 Express: Split backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
I/O drawer availability for Power 710/720/730/740/750 Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Power 755 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Power 755 at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Power 755 HPC cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Power 770 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Power 770 at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Power 775 supercomputing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Power 775 supercomputing at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Power 780 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
Power 780 at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Power 770/780: Front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Power 770/780: Rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Power 795 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
Power 795 at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Power 795 layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Power 795 processor / memory book node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
I/O drawer availability for Power 755/770/780/795 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48
I/O drawer example: 12X I/O Drawer PCI-X DDR (#5796) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
I/O drawer example: 12X I/O Drawer PCIe, SFF disk (#5802) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
I/O location codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Physical location code convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52

iv PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

TOC View location codes: From the HMC GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53

View location codes: From AIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Flexible service processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Advanced System Management interface (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Advanced System Management interface (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
ASMI example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Exercise: System hardware components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62

Unit 3. Hardware Management Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.1. HMC overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Topic 1 objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Power Systems Management Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Hardware Management Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Latest available HMCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
HMC connection to the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
HMC: Managed System and LPAR communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Configuring a new HMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
HMC V7 web UI: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
HMC pre-login welcome screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
HMC login sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Disconnect versus logoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Reconnecting to login session (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Reconnecting to login session (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
HMC Welcome screen after login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
HMC V7 user interface: Overall structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Flexibility: Launching tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Server table view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
LPAR table view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
LPAR consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
HMC online help and documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
HMC V7 documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Work area: Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Toolbar features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Flexibility: Filtering columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Flexibility: Sort options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Flexibility: Custom groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Status Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
SRC lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
HMC Management: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Systems Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
System Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Service Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
User settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Contents v

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

HMC network configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43

HMC network options: Local HMC (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45
HMC network options: Local HMC (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47
FSP network options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49
Local single HMC with redundant FSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-50
Local redundant HMCs network configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51
Redundant remote HMC configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-52
Set up HMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-53
Configure HMC: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55
Logon panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-56
Setup wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-57
Guided Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-58
Display prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-59
Set date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-60
Change passwords: hscroot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-61
Change passwords: root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-62
Add HMC users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-63
Completion checkpoint message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-65
Network settings: HMC identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-66
Network settings: LAN Adapters (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-67
Network settings: LAN Adapters (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-68
Network settings: LAN Adapters (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-70
Network settings: LAN Adapters (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-71
Network settings: LAN firewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-73
Network settings: Name Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-75
Network settings: Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-76
HMC TCP/IP relationship to FSP (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-78
HMC TCP/IP relationship to FSP (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-80
Completion checkpoint message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-82
Contact information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-83
Email notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-84
Configuration completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-85
Reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-86
After reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-87
First connection to a managed system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-88
HMC TCP/IP relationship to FSP (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-89
HMC TCP/IP relationship to FSP (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-90
Success . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-91
Local versus remote HMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-92
View HMC Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-93
Shut Down or Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-94
Schedule Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-95
Change Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-96
Test Network Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-97
Change User Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-98
Change Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-99
Launch Guided Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-100
Welcome text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-101

vi PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

TOC Add Managed System (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102

Add Managed System (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103
Add Managed System (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104
Managing the server or HMC connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105
Check managed system status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107
Check HMC software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109
Topic 1: Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110
3.2. HMC users, remote access, and security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111
Topic 2: HMC users, remote access, and security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112
HMC user management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113
Change User Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
Add or manage HMC users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
Add an HMC user (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116
Add an HMC user (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-119
HMC users: Resources and task roles example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120
Task roles management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-121
Add task role example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122
Managed resource roles management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-123
Add managed resource role example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-124
Copy User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-125
HMC remote access options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-126
Remote CLI access: Secure Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-127
Remote web access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128
Browser settings: Firefox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-129
Browser settings: Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-130
HMC firewall settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131
Remote logon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-132
Enabling remote browser access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133
Enable or disable remote options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134
Using remote HMC commands (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-135
Using remote HMC commands (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-136
SSH login environment on the HMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-137
HMC CLI: What is available then? (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-138
HMC CLI: What is available then? (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-140
Remote access security: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-142
Topic 2: Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-143
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-144
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-145
Exercise: Exploring the HMC V7 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-146
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-147

Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
The major maintenance components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Backup critical console data (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Backup critical console data (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Backup critical console data (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Scheduling backups (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Contents vii

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Scheduling backups (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9

Check HMC code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
HMC update methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
HMC corrective service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12
HMC Corrective Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (1 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (2 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (3 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (4 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19
Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (5 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
HMC software upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
Prepare for HMC software upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
HMC reload procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Managed system firmware update (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Managed system firmware update (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Examine current firmware level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Obtaining new firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Change LIC for current release (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Change LIC for current release (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Exercise: HMC and managed system maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35

Unit 5. System power management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Managed system power states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Managed system power on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Managed system power on options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Power on: Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
Power on: System Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Power on: Hardware Discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
System initialization (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
System initialization (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Power Off managed system (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Power off managed system (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Exercise: System power management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Partition environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Partition resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Dividing the system resources (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Dividing the system resources (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Creating partitions and profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Memory resources (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9

viii PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

TOC Memory resources (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Memory usage (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Memory usage (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Processor resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
I/O resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Virtual SCSI devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Virtual Ethernet options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Create a logical partition: System state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Create logical partition wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Partition ID and name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Profile name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Set processor type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Configure dedicated processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Configure shared processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Memory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Configure I/O slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Virtual I/O adapters setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Logical Host Ethernet Adapter (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Logical Host Ethernet Adapter (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Logical Host Ethernet Adapter (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Host Channel Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Optional Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Check logical partition Profile Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Editing a partition's configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Additional configuration options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Exercise: Configuring logical partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42

Unit 7. Partition operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Web-based user interface: Systems Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Activating partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Activate partitions with a system profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Activating an individual partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Activating with open terminal window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Terminal window: Normal boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Activating with advanced options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Open or close a terminal window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Stopping a partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Partition shutdown options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Create a system profile (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Create a system profile (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Validate allocations with a system profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Change the default partition profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Managing partition profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Save configuration in a partition profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Contents ix

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Delete a partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-25

Backing up partition profile data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-26
Restoring partition profile data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27
Managing backup files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-28
Backup and restore from the HMC CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-29
Scheduling operations (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-30
Scheduling operations (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-31
Scheduling operations (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-32
Scheduling operations (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-33
Troubleshooting activation failures (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34
Troubleshooting activation failures (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-35
Troubleshooting activation failures (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36
Checkpoint (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-37
Checkpoint (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-38
Exercise: Partition operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-39
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-40

Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1

Unit objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Dynamic logical partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
DLPAR operations overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
How DLPAR works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
DLPAR operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Dedicated processor operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Shared processing units operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Move memory operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Add I/O slots operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
AIX commands for I/O operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Removing I/O slots in AIX (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Removing I/O slots in AIX (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Remove I/O slots operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
DLPAR status (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
DLPAR status (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
DLPAR status (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
DLPAR status (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
DLPAR troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
List resources with lshwres command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
chhwres HMC command for DLPAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Exercise: Dynamic resource allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
Unit summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24

Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

x PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

TMK Trademarks
The reader should recognize that the following terms, which appear in the content of this
training document, are official trademarks of IBM or other companies:
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
The following are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United
States, or other countries, or both:
Active Memory AIX 6 AIX
BladeCenter developerWorks EnergyScale
IBM Systems Director Active
Express Focal Point
Energy Manager
OS/400 POWER Hypervisor Power Systems
Power Systems Software Power PowerHA
PowerPC PowerVM POWER6+
POWER6 POWER7 Redbooks
Resource Link System i System p
System p5 System z
Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the
United States and other countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or
both.
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other
countries, or both.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other
countries.
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Oracle and/or its affiliates.
Other product and service names might be trademarks of IBM or other companies.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Trademarks xi

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

xii PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

pref Course description

Power Systems for AIX I: LPAR Configuration and Planning

Duration: 3 days

Purpose
Learn how to perform system administration in a Power Systems
environment. Learn about the features of PowerVM Editions and how
to configure and manage LPARs running AIX V7.1 using the Hardware
Management Console (HMC).

Audience
This course is appropriate for system administrators, technical support
individuals, and IBM business partners who implement LPARs on IBM
Power Systems.

Prerequisites
This introductory course does not require any logical partitioning
experience.
General TCP/IP knowledge is strongly recommended. This
prerequisite can be met by attending TCP/IP for AIX System
Administrators (AN21).

Objectives
After completing this course, you should be able to:
Describe important concepts associated with managing POWER7
processor-based systems, such as logical partitioning, dynamic
partitioning, virtual devices, virtual processors, virtual consoles,
virtual local area network (VLAN), and shared processors
Describe the features of the PowerVM editions
Use the System Planning Tool to plan an LPAR configuration
Describe the functions of the HMC
Configure and manage the HMC, including users and permissions,
software, startup and shutdown, remote access features, network
configuration, security features, HMC backup and restore options,
and the HMC reload procedure

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Course description xiii

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Describe the rules associated with allocating resources, including

dedicated processors, processing units for micro-partitions,
memory, logical host Ethernet adapter, and physical I/O for AIX and
Linux partitions
Configure and manage LPARs using the HMC graphical user
interface (GUI) and HMC commands
Interpret physical and AIX location codes and relate to the key
hardware components
Power on and power off the POWER7-based system
Use the HMC to back up and restore partition data
Perform dynamic LPAR operations

xiv PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

pref Agenda
Day 1
Welcome
Unit 1: Introduction to partitioning
Exercise 1: Introduction to partitioning
Unit 2: Hardware system overview
Exercise 2: System hardware components
Unit 3: Hardware Management Console

Day 2
Unit 3: Hardware Management Console (continued)
Exercise 3: Exploring the HMC V7 interface
Unit 4: Hardware Management Console maintenance
Exercise 4: HMC and managed system maintenance
Unit 5: System power management
Exercise 5: System power management
Unit 6: Planning and configuring logical partitions

Day 3
Unit 6: Planning and configuring logical partitions (continued)
Exercise 6: Configuring logical partitions
Unit 7: Partition operations
Exercise 7: Partition operations
Unit 8: Dynamic LPAR infrastructure
Exercise 8: Dynamic resource allocation

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Agenda xv

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

xvi PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning

What this unit is about

This unit introduces basic partitioning concepts and features on IBM
POWER6, and POWER7 processor-based servers.

What you should be able to do

After completing this unit, you should be able to:
Describe the following terms:
- Partition, logical partition (LPAR), resource
Describe the following partition concepts:
- Dynamic logical partitioning
- Micro-partitioning
- Shared processor pool
- Virtual I/O
- Live Partition Mobility (LPM)
- Capacity on demand (CoD)
Describe the functions of the Hardware Management Console
(HMC)
Describe the functions performed by the POWER Hypervisor
Describe the overall process for configuring partitions
List references for IBM POWER6 and POWER7 processor-based
system partitioning

How you will check your progress

Checkpoint questions
Machine exercises

References
http://publib16.boulder.ibm.com/pseries/index.htm
IBM System p and AIX Information Center
SG247940 IBM PowerVM Virtualization Introduction and
Configuration Redbook

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-1

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Unit objectives
IBM Power Systems

After completing this unit, you should be able to:

Describe the following terms:
Partition, logical partition (LPAR), resource
Describe the following partition concepts:
Dynamic logical partitioning
Micro-partitioning
Shared processor pool
Virtual I/O
Live Partition Mobility (LPM)
Capacity on demand (CoD)
Describe the functions of the Hardware Management Console (HMC)
Describe the functions performed by the POWER Hypervisor
Describe the overall process for configuring partitions
List references for IBM POWER6 and POWER7 processor-based
system partitioning
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-1. Unit objectives AN113.0

Notes:
The objectives list what you should be able to do at the end of this unit.

1-2 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

What is a partition?
IBM Power Systems

A partition is the end result of partitioning.

Partitioning is the process of subdividing the HW resources of a
computer system into multiple smaller independent environments
over which an operating system can be hosted.
A partition is a full fledged node with its own system resources.

From one to many.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-2. What is a partition? AN113.0

Notes:
Partition
When a computer system is subdivided into multiple, independent operating system
images, those independent operating environments are called partitions. The resources on
the system are divided among the partitions. Applications running on a partitioned system
do not have to be redesigned for the partitioned environment.
Independent operating environment
Each partition runs its own operating system that might or might not match operating
systems in other partitions on the same system. Each partition can be started and stopped
independently of other partitions.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-3

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Physical partition
IBM Power Systems

Physical partition:
Resources are allocated in physical building blocks.
Blocks contain groups of processors, memory, and I/O slots.

Interconnect

SMP building block SMP building block SMP building block

Operating system Operating

system

CPU, CPU, CPU,

memory, and I/O memory, and I/O memory, and I/O

Physical partition Physical partition

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-3. Physical partition AN113.0

Notes:
This page defines physical partitioning, which we will contrast with logical partitioning on
the next visual. IBM Power Systems support logical partitions (LPARs), not physical
partitions (PPARs).
PPARs
The visual shows an example of a system with three system building blocks, each made up
of a number of processors, an amount of memory, and a number of I/O slots. These three
building blocks can be configured into one, two, or three partitions, each made up of one or
more entire building blocks. The size of the building blocks depends on the vendor and
system model.
Adding or removing resources
To add or remove resources in a PPAR environment, entire building blocks must be added
or removed. For example, if more memory is needed, you might have to add more
processors and I/O slots.

1-4 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Logical partition
IBM Power Systems

A partition is the allocation of system resources to create

logically separate systems within the same physical footprint.
A logical partition exists when the isolation is implemented
with firmware:
Not based on physical system building block.
Provides configuration flexibility.

SYS1 SYS2 SYS3 SYS4

1:00 10:00 11:00 12:00
Japan USA Brazil UK

AIX 7 Linux AIX 6 IBM i

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-4. Logical partition AN113.0

Notes:
Logical partitioning is the ability to make a single system run as if it were two or more
systems. Each partition represents a division of resources in your computer system. The
partitions are logical because the division of resources is virtual and not along physical
boundaries. There are, however, configuration rules that must be followed.
For the rest of the course, logical partitions will be called LPARs or partitions for brevity.
Implemented in firmware
The system uses firmware to allocate resources to partitions and manage the access to
those resources. Although there are configuration rules, the granularity of the units of
resources that can be allocated to partitions is very flexible. You can add just a small
amount of memory (if that is all that is needed) without a dependency on the size of the
memory cards and without having to add more processors or I/O slots that are not needed.
Firmware refers to underlying software running on a system independently from any
operating system. On IBM Power Systems, this includes the System firmware, Device
firmware, and HMC Firmware.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-5

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Partition characteristics
IBM Power Systems

Each partition has its own:

Operating system
Licensed Internal Code (LIC) and Open Firmware
Console
Resources
Other things expected in a stand-alone operating system environment,
such as:
Problem logs
Data (libraries, objects, file systems)
Performance characteristics
Network identity
Date and time

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-5. Partition characteristics AN113.0

Notes:
Characteristics of a partition
The visual illustrates how each partition is independent. As stated before, each partition
runs its own operating system. The version of the operating system can be any valid
version that is supported on the system. Other things you would expect on a physically
separate system are also separate for partitions. There are even independent virtual
consoles.
What is the same between partitions on the same system?
Each partition shares a few physical system attributes, such as the system serial number,
system model, and processor feature code with other partitions. In addition, you can
choose to share other hardware, such as Small Computer System Interface (SCSI)
devices, among partitions.
The planar in an I/O drawer is also an example of a component that is used by all LPARs
that use an adapter on that planar.

1-6 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Partition resources
IBM Power Systems

Resources are allocated to partitions:

Memory allocated in units as small as the LMB size
Dedicated whole processors or shared processing units
Individual I/O slots
Including virtual devices
Some resources can be shared.
Virtual devices
Host Ethernet adapter
Some core system components are inherently shared.

AIX Linux AIX

PPPPP PP PPP
MMM MM MM
SSSS SSSS SSSS

S = I/O slot
M = Memory
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012
P = Processor
Figure 1-6. Partition resources AN113.0

Notes:
Resources
Resources are the system components that are configured into partitions.
The maximum number of partitions depends on system model and the total amount of
resources on the system. For example, a system with eight processors can be configured
with a total of 80 partitions (if there are sufficient resources). If a system has enough
resources, the upper limit is 1024 partitions.
Minimum amount of resources
Each partition must be configured with at least 256 MB of memory, one tenth of a physical
processor, and enough I/O devices to provide a boot disk and a connection to a network.
Memory
Memory is allocated in units known as the logical memory block (LMB). The default LMB
size is variable, depending on the total amount of physical memory installed, and might be
as small as 16 MB.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-7

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Processors
A partition is configured with either dedicated whole processors or shared processors.
Shared processors are allocated in processing units. 1.0 processing units is equivalent to
the processing power of one processor. Partitions are configured with at least 0.1
processing units or with as much as the equivalent of all the available physical processors.
After the 0.1 minimum is satisfied, additional processing units can be allocated in quantities
of 0.01 processing units.
I/O slots
I/O resources are allocated to partitions at the slot level. At a minimum, you must configure
a partition with enough I/O resources to include the boot disk and a network connection.
Shared devices
With software called the Virtual I/O Server (VIOS) installed in a special partition, Ethernet
and storage devices can be configured to be shared between partitions.
Secure environments and shared I/O
Highly secure environments can choose not to take full advantage of the cross-partition
sharing of devices. Even subtle visibility (for example, different response times from a
shared resource) can be considered a covert channel of communication. For this reason,
by design, all shared or virtual resources must be consciously enabled.
Shared core resources
Some devices can be shared because they are core resources to the entire system. For
example, even though you have allocated separate amounts of memory to different
partitions, that memory can be on the same memory card. Likewise, processors, I/O
drawers, and other core system components are shared. Because of this, a hardware
failure might bring down more than one partition and could potentially bring down the entire
system; however, there are many fault containment, in-line recovery, and redundancy
features of the system to minimize unrecoverable failures.

1-8 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

LPAR resource example

IBM Power Systems

Flexibility to allocate resources depending on need.

With DLPAR operations, resources can be moved, removed,
or added with a restarting the partition.

LPAR 1 LPAR 2 LPAR 3 LPAR 4

Processors

Memory

I/O slots

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-7. LPAR resource example AN113.0

Notes:
This visual shows how a systems resources might be divided among four partitions. With
LPARs, resources can be allocated based on computing needs. You do not need to
allocate all resources to partitions; that is, some resources might remain unallocated until
they are needed.
Dynamic logical partitioning
With dynamic logical partitioning (DLPAR), resources can be added, removed, or moved
between partitions as computing needs change without restarting the partitions.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-9

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

IBM POWER6 LPAR-capable systems

IBM Power Systems

IBM POWER6 processor-based LPAR-capable systems:

IBM Power Systems
Example models:
IBM Power Blade Express servers
IBM Power 520
IBM Power 550
IBM Power 560
IBM Power 570
IBM Power 575
IBM Power 595

Visit http://www.ibm.com for latest list of models.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-8. IBM POWER6 LPAR-capable systems AN113.0

Notes:
The visual lists IBM POWER6 processor-based servers that support LPAR.

1-10 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM POWER7 LPAR-capable systems

IBM Power Systems

IBM POWER7 processor-based LPAR-capable systems:

IBM Power Systems
Example models:
IBM Power Blade Express server
IBM Power 710 Express
IBM Power 720 Express
IBM Power 730 Express
IBM Power 740 Express
IBM Power 750 Express
IBM Power 755
IBM Power 770
IBM Power 775 Supercomputer
IBM Power 780
IBM Power 795
Visit http://www.ibm.com for latest list of models.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-9. IBM POWER7 LPAR-capable systems AN113.0

Notes:
The visual lists IBM POWER7 processor-based servers that support LPAR.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-11

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Benefits of using partitions

IBM Power Systems

Capacity management:
Flexibility to allocate resources
Consolidation:
Consolidate hardware, floor space, software licenses, support contracts, and
in-house support and operations
Efficient use of resources
Application isolation on a single frame:
Separate workloads
Guaranteed resources
Data integrity
Merge production and test environments:
Test on same hardware

The ability to have virtual Ethernet and virtual I/O devices is a benefit to using
POWER5, POWER6, and POWER7 processor-based partitions.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-10. Benefits of using partitions AN113.0

Notes:
Sometimes large, symmetric multiprocessing systems are used to run several different
applications. This can be an efficient use of resources in some cases. In other cases,
separate physical computers are used to run individual applications. This page describes
reasons why it might be better to create separate partitions rather than run everything in
the same operating system image or use separate physical computers for each application.
Capacity management
You might want to use partitions to dynamically reallocate resources when the system
workload changes. For example, if at the end of each month, one partition runs
CPU-intensive batch jobs, you can reconfigure the system monthly to take processors from
another lower priority partition and loan them to the partition with the batch application.
Consolidation
Using partitions gives you the ability to reallocate expensive resources and manage them
all with one interface (the HMC). You can reallocate processors, memory, or any I/O
adapter (and thus device) by reconfiguring the partitions or by using dynamic partition

1-12 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty operations. All of the resources are located within one server, potentially reducing the
amount of floor space needed.
Application isolation
Partitioning isolates an application from others in different partitions. For example, two
applications on one SMP system could interfere with each other or compete for the same
resources. One decision support database query could bring a second, interactive
application to a frustrating snails pace. By separating the applications into their own
partitions, they cannot interfere with each other. Also, if one application were to hang or
crash the operating system, this would not have an effect on the other partitions.
Also, with partitions, one server can support multiple applications that use different time
zones or that run on different operating system release levels.
Partitions can also be used to comply with application license requirements. For example,
a four processor partition could be created to comply with an application license that only
allows for a four processor server. Check the vendors application license requirements
carefully.
Merge production and test environments
Many customers utilize smaller development systems to develop, test, and migrate
applications. These smaller systems might not be the same hardware or have the same
software, devices, or infrastructure as the real production system. These issues can be
largely avoided by utilizing a partition on the same system as the production applications
for development and testing. This also protects the production partition from the activities
on the test partition. When the testing is complete, the resources used for the development
partition can be reallocated to the production partition.
Partitions have an exclusive set of resources
The amount of resources allocated to a partition is generally fixed (although there are some
exceptions that can be configured). This could be a benefit or a disadvantage. On a
symmetric multiprocessor system running multiple applications within the same operating
system image, there might be greater sharing of resources than on a partitioned system
where the applications are isolated in their own partitions.
Virtual Ethernet and virtual I/O devices
On POWER6 and POWER7 processor-based servers, you can configure a virtual Ethernet
connection that acts like an Ethernet connection but is really a memory-to-memory
connection with another partition. Virtual I/O devices allow partitions to use physical
devices that are owned by another partition. Also, the Host Ethernet Adapter (or HEA),
which is available on all IBM Power Systems (except high-end servers), provides logical
Ethernet adapters that communicate directly to LPARs. This reduces the possible overall
interaction with the POWER Hypervisor.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-13

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Software licensing
IBM Power Systems

Licensing is per operating system and is based on processing

power.
Partial processor and shared processor pool features affect licensing.
Third-party application provider licenses will vary.

Other software

Operating systems

IBM hardware

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-11. Software licensing AN113.0

Notes:
Software licenses on a partitioned system
A partition runs its own separate copy of an operating system and programs. Language
feature codes, security, user data, most system values, and software release and fixes,
also known as program temporary fixes (PTFs), are unique for each partition.
For third-party software, you will have to discuss with the vendor how to license packages
on a partitioned system.
Effect of using sub-processors
Because operating systems and many other applications use the number of processors as
the basis for licensing, if you use shared processors and take advantage of sub-processor
allocations, IBM rounds up to the nearest whole number in calculating the appropriate
software licenses, and IBM will not charge you for more software licenses than the number
of physical processors on your server.
If you plan to run different operating systems on the same server, you need licenses for
each individual operating system. The licenses are based on processing power. For

1-14 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty example, on an eight processor system, you might have licenses for seven processors for
AIX 6 and one processor for Linux. If you reconfigure your partitions so that, for example,
you have 7.2 processors in the partition running AIX 6 and your licenses only allow seven
processors, you will receive out-of- compliance messages. Either contact IBM to purchase
more licenses or reconfigure the partition to use less processing power to stop these
messages.
Effect of using the shared processor pool
For now, it is sufficient to understand that a software license must be purchased to cover
the maximum processing power that your partition might have at any point. POWER6 and
POWER7 advanced processing features allow partitions using the shared processor pool
to optionally use excess processing power from other partitions. This configuration feature
is called uncapped processor allocation. Because a partition that uses uncapped processor
allocation could potentially use all of the processors in the shared processing pool, the
license for the software in that partition must take this into account.
The POWER6 and POWER7 multiple shared processor feature can reduce the number of
software licenses by putting a limit on the amount of processors that an uncapped partition
can use.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-15

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

POWER Hypervisor functions

IBM Power Systems

The POWER Hypervisor is firmware that provides:

Virtual memory management:
Controls page table and I/O access.
Manages real memory addresses versus offset memory addresses.
Virtual console support
Security and isolation between partitions:
Partitions allowed access only to resources allocated to them (enforced by
the POWER Hypervisor).
Shared processor pool management

LPAR 1 LPAR 2 LPAR 3 LPAR 4

POWER Hypervisor Security and

isolation barriers
System hardware
(memory, processors, devices)
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-12. POWER Hypervisor functions AN113.0

Notes:
Introduction to the POWER Hypervisor
Partitions are isolated from each other by firmware (underlying software) called the
POWER Hypervisor. The names POWER Hypervisor and hypervisor will be used
interchangeably in this course.
Virtual memory management by the hypervisor
There is no program access permitted between partition memory and I/O memory.
Software exceptions and crashes are contained within a partition. The hypervisor controls
the page tables used by partitions to ensure a partition has access to only its own physical
memory segments. It uses a physical memory offset value for each partition so that the
operating system in each partition can continue to use memory address zero as its starting
point.
Virtual console support
The hypervisor provides input/output streams for a virtual console device that can be
presented on the HMC.

1-16 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty Security and isolation between partitions

Besides managing virtual memory, the hypervisor also ensures that a partition accesses
only devices allocated to it. It also clears memory, reinitializes processors, resets processor
registers, and resets I/O devices when devices are allocated to a partition (statically or
dynamically).
Shared processor pools
Always active on POWER6 and POWER7-based servers, the POWER Hypervisor is
responsible for dispatching the LPAR workload across the shared physical processors. The
hypervisor creates a shared processor pool from which it allocates virtual processors to the
LPARs as needed.
Micro-partitioning (or shared processing) allows LPARs to share the processors in shared
processor pools. Each LPAR that uses shared processors is assigned a specific amount of
processor power from its shared processor pool.
On POWER6 and POWER7-based systems there is support for multiple shared processor
pools (MSPPs).

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-17

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Hardware Management Console

IBM Power Systems

The Hardware Management Console (HMC) provides:

Virtual console windows
LPAR configuration and operation management
Capacity on demand (CoD) management
Service tools
Access to LPM function
PC-based console:
Running custom Linux and Java applications
Remotely accessible
Connects to service processor over private or open network

Desktop Rack mount

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-13. Hardware Management Console AN113.0

Notes:
HMC description
The HMC is a PC-based console that is available in a desktop or a rack-mount model. It
runs a customized version of Linux with a Java-based management application. The user
can only access the management application, and no additional applications can be
installed. A second HMC can be connected to a single managed system for redundancy.
Multiple managed systems can be managed by a single HMC.
Check the IBM Power Systems Hardware Information Center for the latest information
about the HMC hardware and software:
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/powersys/v3r1m5/index.jsp
Remote access to the HMC functions
Remote access to the HMC Version 7 application is provided by using a web browser from
a remote workstation. By default, remote browser access to the HMC is enabled. In
addition, there are extensive HMC command-line controls accessible through the use of
the Secure Shell (SSH).

1-18 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty HMC: Independent from the managed system and its partitions
The managed system refers to the system being managed by the HMC. Although the HMC
is necessary for some functions, such as configuring LPARs, it will not affect the operation
of any partitions if something goes wrong. The partition configuration information is not only
kept on the HMC, but it is also kept in Non-Volatile RAM (NVRAM) on the managed
system; therefore, if the HMC were to crash, the partitions would continue to run. In fact,
you can remove the HMC, replace it with another, and then download the partition data
from the NVRAM on the managed system without affecting the running of the partitions.
Service errors focal point
If a hardware error occurs, that error can be reported by multiple partitions. To prevent
confusion, the HMC is also used as a service focal point for error reporting. An application
on the HMC serves as a filter for errors to ensure IBM service calls are placed only once
per actual hardware error. Alternatively, a partition configured as the service partition can
collect system errors and report them to IBM.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-19

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

The big picture

IBM Power Systems

Managed system
Unassigned
AIX Linux
resources
HMC
Partition 1 Partition 2

Hypervisor
Non-Volatile RAM

Service
Processors
processor
Memory Ethernet
LPAR
I/O Slots
allocation
tables

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-14. The big picture AN113.0

Notes:
This visual brings together several concepts.
Partitions are independent operating environments, and their resources are managed
by the hypervisor.
NVRAM is used on the managed system to hold a copy of the partition configuration so
that if the HMC or the network fails, the partitions can continue to run and even reboot if
necessary.
Partitions are configured and managed on the HMC, which is a separate Linux PC
console. A copy of the partition configuration data is also kept on the HMC (in addition
to the primary copy in NVRAM).
The HMC is connected to the managed system through an Ethernet connection to the
service processor. The service processor is a separate, independent processor that
provides hardware initialization during system load, monitoring of environmental and
error events, and maintenance support.

1-20 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Advanced partition features

IBM Power Systems

Dynamic resource allocation

Advanced processor concepts
Virtual I/O
Integrated Virtual Ethernet
Active Memory Sharing
Live Partition Mobility
Capacity on demand

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-15. Advanced partition features AN113.0

Notes:
This visual lists the advanced partition features covered in the rest of this unit.
The dynamic resource allocation, the advanced processor configuration options, the virtual
I/O, and the CoD are features available on POWER5, POWER6, and POWER7
processor-based servers.
Live Partition Mobility
Live Partition Mobility (LPM) is a POWER6 and POWER7-based feature that enables you
to migrate running AIX and Linux partitions and their hosted applications from one physical
server to another without disrupting the infrastructure services. The migration operation,
which takes just a few seconds, maintains complete system transactional integrity. The
migration transfers the entire system environment, including processor state, memory,
attached virtual devices, and connected users.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-21

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Dynamic partitioning
IBM Power Systems

DLPAR is the ability to add, remove, or move resources

between partitions without restarting the partitions.
Resources include:
Processors, memory, and I/O slots.
The ability to add and remove virtual devices.
Security and isolation between LPARs are not compromised.
A partition sees its own resources plus other available virtual
resources.
Resources are reset when moved.
Applications might or might not be DLPAR-aware.

DLPAR allows you to react to

changing resource needs.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-16. Dynamic partitioning AN113.0

Notes:
Dynamic partitioning refers to the ability to move resources between partitions without
shutting down the partitions. The opposite of dynamic partitioning is static partitioning,
where new configurations are only used when a partition is reactivated.
DLPAR operations do not weaken the security or isolation between LPARs. A partition sees
only resources that have been explicitly allocated to the partition along with any potential
connectors for additional virtual resources that might have been configured.
Resources are reset when moved from one partition to another. Processors are
reinitialized, memory regions are cleared, and adapter slots are reset.
DLPAR operations
You can add, remove, and move resources among partitions. The resources include
memory regions, processing units, and I/O slots. This can be accomplished from the HMC
application or by using HMC command-line commands.

1-22 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty With virtual devices, you can add or remove them, but you cannot move them directly from
one partition to another. You can, however, dynamically change the configuration that
specifies what type of virtual adapter is in a virtual slot.
With the Integrated Virtual Ethernet (IVE), you can add or remove logical host Ethernet
adapters (LHEAs). You can even move LHEAs from one partition to another dynamically.
Applications might not be DLPAR-aware
Most applications are unaware of the underlying resource specifics, but some applications
and utilities, particularly monitoring tools, might inhibit some DLPAR operations if they bind
to processors or pin memory. Many resource-aware applications have been rewritten in
recent years to allow DLPAR. Check with your sales representative about your
applications.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-23

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

How DLPAR works

IBM Power Systems

1
HMC command HMC
2

3 3

Partition A Partition B

Hypervisor 4
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-17. How DLPAR works AN113.0

Notes:
The visual illustrates how a dynamic move operation works.
The DLPAR request originates at the HMC.
The request is made over the network to the POWER Hypervisor.
Partition A and Partition B communicate with the HMC about the DLPAR operation
through a process running on both partitions.
The POWER Hypervisor makes the resource allocation change.
As you can see in the visual, DLPAR operations are dependent on a functioning network
between the HMC and the managed system and between the HMC and the partitions. The
link between the HMC and the service processor is used to initiate the operation and
process the hardware add or remove operation. The link to the partition or partitions from
the HMC is used to notify the operating system of the hardware changes, enabling it to take
actions as required.
If the network is down, either between the HMC and the managed system or between the
partitions and the HMC, DLPAR operations cannot occur.

1-24 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Processor concepts
IBM Power Systems

Logical

LPAR LPAR LPAR Virtual

Shared

Dedicated

Inactive (CoD)

Deconfigured

Physical
(installed)
Shared processor pool
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-18. Processor concepts AN113.0

Notes:
This visual summarizes the various concepts concerning POWER5, POWER6, and
POWER7 processors. We will see in the next slides that POWER6 and POWER7-based
processor systems support other features, such as multiple virtual shared processor pools.
Along the bottom are whole, physical processors installed in the computer system. These
are configured in various ways into the three partitions.
Processing units, partial processors, and logical processors
Partitions are allocated in dedicated whole processors or in processing units. A processing
unit is the equivalent of 1.0 of a physical processor. A partition can be configured with as
little as 0.1 processing units, and after that minimum is satisfied, processing units can be
allocated in units of 0.01 processing units.
The terms micro-partitioning and partial processors refer to the ability to allocate less than
a whole physical processor to a partition.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-25

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Deconfigured
A physical processor can be automatically deconfigured from the system because of
detected errors or user deconfiguration.
Inactive, CoD processors
Inactive processors can be added as a dedicated or shared processor through the
activation of a CoD license key. CoD is an option that can be purchased. You will learn
more about this in a few moments.
Shared versus dedicated processors
Dedicated processors are physical processors that are allocated to a partition and are
dedicated to that partition. Other partitions will not use any time slices on those processors
while that partition is active. Shared processors are put into a shared pool. Partitions use
processing units from the pools as needed within configuration guidelines.
Virtual processors
If you were to allocate 2.0 processing units to a partition, the partition might get bits of
execution time on up to 20 physical processors. This concept is known as virtual
processors.
Virtual processors are the representation of the assigned processing units (defined as
processors) in the operating system. To run threads, the operating system dispatches
threads to the virtual processors. The hypervisor takes the threads and dispatches them to
physical processors. The number of virtual processors in the operating system limits the
number of physical processors the hypervisor can use for that partition during each clock
cycle. The processing units are spread across the virtual processors.
Logical processors
If simultaneous multithreading is enabled, each virtual processor can be utilized as with two
logical processors on POWER5 and POWER6-based systems and up to four logical
processors on POWER7-based systems.

1-26 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Micro-partitioning: Shared processor pool

IBM Power Systems

Time sliced sub-processor allocations are dispatched

according to demand and entitled capacity.
This example shows one 10 ms time slice, seven running partitions,
and four processors.
Physical
processors

Partition 1
P P P P Partition 2
10ms
Partition 3
Partition 4
Partition 5
Partition 6
Partition 7

Shared processor pool

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-19. Micro-partitioning: Shared processor pool AN113.0

Notes:
Micro-partitioning is defined as the ability to create a partition and allocate fractional
amounts of processing capacity to it.
Processing power can be allocated to partitions using dedicated processors or shared
processors. For shared processor partitions, processing power can be allocated in the
granularity of 0.01 processing units. A partition must have a minimum of 0.1 processing
units.
The visual shows seven partitions being run on a processing pool of four physical
processors. The diagram represents a single 10 millisecond (ms) interval. Each partition
gets a percentage of the execution dispatch time on the processors in the pool, based on
its capacity assignment.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-27

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Multiple shared processor pools

IBM Power Systems

Up to 64
Shared processor pooln
Shared processor pool1 Set of micro-partitions shared
Set of micro-partitions
Shared processor pool0 processor
Set of micro-partitions
LPAR pools
LPAR1 LPAR3 LPAR
LPAR2 LPAR4
LPAR5
LPAR6

Shared

Dedicated

Physical
processors

Physical shared processor pool

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-20. Multiple shared processor pools AN113.0

Notes:
By default, all physical processors that are not dedicated to specific LPARs are grouped
together in a shared processor pool. You can assign a specific amount of the processing
capacity in this shared processor pool to each LPAR that uses shared processors.
With POWER6 and POWER7, you can define MSPPs and assign the shared partitions to
any of these MSPPs. The system administrator can assign a set of micro-partitions to a
specific shared processor pool to control the processor capacity consumed from the
physical processor pool.
Reserved and maximum processing unit values
The administrator can activate a shared processor pool by setting a maximum processing
unit value and, optionally, a reserved processing unit value for that pool. The maximum
processing unit value limits the total number of processing units that can be used by the set
of LPARs in the shared processor pool. The reserved processing unit value is the number
of processing units that are reserved for the use of uncapped LPARs within the shared
processor pool.

1-28 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Virtual I/O
IBM Power Systems

Each partition has virtual I/O slots.

Configurable for each partition.
Virtual slots can have a virtual adapter instance.
Ethernet, SCSI, or Fibre Channel.
Virtual I/O slots can be dynamically added or removed just
like physical I/O slots.
Cannot be dynamically moved to another partition.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-21. Virtual I/O AN113.0

Notes:
Virtual I/O basics
Each partition, by default, is configured to support 10 virtual I/O slots, and each slot can be
populated with a virtual adapter instance, which allows partitions to share devices. It also
provides virtual Ethernet connections between partitions on the same system. More virtual
slots can be configured.
Virtual adapters interact with the operating system like any other adapter card except they
are not physically present. Virtual adapters are recorded in system inventory and
management utilities.
As with physical I/O adapters, a virtual I/O adapter must first be deconfigured from the
operating system to perform a DLPAR remove operation.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-29

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Virtual Ethernet
Virtual Ethernet provides the same function as using an Ethernet adapter and is
implemented through high-speed, inter-partition, in-memory communication. There are two
options with virtual Ethernet:
A virtual Ethernet connection can be configured between two LPARs on the same
managed system. There is no actual physical adapter. This provides a fast network
connection between the partitions.
A virtual Ethernet connection can be configured on one partition to connect to a network
using a shared Ethernet adapter (SEA) of another partition (called a hosting partition or
a Virtual I/O Server) on that managed system.
Virtual SCSI
The virtual SCSI (VSCSI) option provides access to block storage devices in other
partitions (that is, device sharing). It uses the client/server model where the server exports
disks, logical volumes, files, or other SCSI-based devices, and the client sees the imported
device as a standard SCSI device.
Virtual Fibre Channel
A virtual Fibre Channel adapter is a virtual adapter that provides client LPARs with a Fibre
Channel connection to a storage area network through the Virtual I/O Server LPAR. The
Virtual I/O Server partition provides the connection between the virtual Fibre Channel
server adapters and the physical Fibre Channel adapters assigned to the Virtual I/O Server
partition on the managed system.

1-30 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Virtual I/O example

IBM Power Systems

Client Virtual I/O server

partition partition
Physical
Virtual Virtual Virtual Layer 2 Physical network
bridge
Ethernet switch Ethernet Ethernet

Virtual
Ethernet Logical
Virtual Disk
Hypervisor disk

Client Server Device

adapter adapter mapping
SCSI RDMA protocol
DMA
buffer Device DM
A transfer

Different types of
backing storage
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-22. Virtual I/O example AN113.0

Notes:
Client/server relationship
Virtual I/O devices provide for sharing of physical resources, such as adapters and SCSI
devices, among partitions. Multiple partitions can share physical I/O resources, and each
partition can simultaneously use virtual and physical (natively attached) I/O devices. When
sharing SCSI devices, the client/server model is used to designate partitions as users or
suppliers of resources. A server makes a VSCSI server adapter available for use by a
client partition. A client configures a VSCSI client adapter that uses the resources provided
by a VSCSI server adapter.
If a server partition providing I/O for a client partition fails, the client partition might continue
to function, depending on the significance of the hardware it is using. For example, if the
server is providing the paging volume for another partition, a failure of the server partition
will be significant to the client.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-31

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Virtual I/O Server

The IBM Virtual I/O Server software allows the creation of partitions that use the I/O
resources of another partition. In this way, it helps maximize the utilization of physical
resources on POWER5, POWER6, and POWER7 systems. Partitions can have dedicated
I/O, virtual I/O, or both.
Physical resources are assigned to the Virtual I/O Server partition in the same way physical
resources are assigned to other partitions.
Virtual I/O Server is a separate software product, and it is included as part of the PowerVM
Express, Standard, and Enterprise edition system features.
See the Virtual I/O Server support website for specific devices that are supported:
https://www.ibm.com/support/entry/myportal/Overview/Software/Virtualization_software/
PowerVM_Virtual_I~O_Server
VSCSI adapters
VSCSI adapters provide the ability for a partition to use SCSI devices that are owned by
another partition. For example, one partition can provide disk storage space to other
partitions.
Virtual Ethernet
There are two main features to virtual Ethernet. One is the inter-partition virtual switch to
provide support for connecting up to 4,096 local area networks (LANs). LAN IDs are used
to configure virtual Ethernet LANs. All partitions using a particular LAN ID can
communicate with each other.
The other feature is a function called SEA, which bridges networks together without using
TCP/IP routing. This function allows the partition to appear to be connected directly to an
external network. The main benefit of using this feature is that each partition need not have
its own physical network adapter.
Virtual Fibre Channel adapters
With N_Port ID virtualization (NPIV) you can configure the managed system so that
multiple LPARs can access independent physical storage through the same physical Fibre
Channel adapter.
To access physical storage in a typical storage area network (SAN) that uses Fibre
Channel, the physical storage is mapped to logical units (LUNs), and the LUNs are mapped
to the ports of physical Fibre Channel adapters. Each physical port on each physical Fibre
Channel adapter is identified using one worldwide port name (WWPN).
NPIV is a standard technology for Fibre Channel networks that enables you to connect
multiple LPARs to one physical port of a physical Fibre Channel adapter. Each LPAR is
identified by a unique WWPN, which means you can connect each LPAR to independent
physical storage on an SAN.

1-32 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Integrated Virtual Ethernet

IBM Power Systems

Also referred to as host Ethernet adapter.

Available on most POWER6 and POWER7 servers (except high-end).
Provides network connectivity for LPARs without a virtual I/O
server:
Integrated high-speed Ethernet ports with hardware-assisted
virtualization capabilities.
Offers virtualization support for Ethernet connections.
Integrated directly into the GX+ bus on a managed system.
An LHEA must be created on the logical partition.
Three types available:
Dual-port 1 Gigabit
Quad-port 1 Gigabit
Dual-port 10 Gigabit

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-23. Integrated Virtual Ethernet AN113.0

Notes:
Host Ethernet adapter
A host Ethernet adapter (HEA) is a physical Ethernet adapter that is integrated directly into
the GX+ bus on a managed system. HEAs offer high throughput, low latency, and
virtualization support for Ethernet connections. HEAs are also known as IVE adapters.
Unlike most other types of I/O devices, you can never assign the HEA itself to an LPAR.
Instead, multiple LPARs can connect directly to the HEA and use the HEA resources. This
allows these LPARs to access external networks through the HEA without having to go
through an Ethernet bridge on another LPAR.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-33

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

IVE example
IBM Power Systems

AIX Linux
LPAR LPAR

ent ent eth

Layer 2 switch Layer 2 switch

Physical Physical
port port

Physical Physical
network network
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-24. IVE example AN113.0

Notes:
In this logical diagram, the AIX and Linux LPARs communicate directly to the HEA,
reducing the interaction with the POWER Hypervisor.
IVE provides a way for an LPAR to communicate with other LPARs or with external
networks without going through a Virtual I/O Server. After you create an LHEA for an LPAR,
a network device is created in the LPAR. This network device is named entX on AIX LPARs
and ethX on Linux LPARs, where X represents sequentially assigned numbers. The user
can then set up a TCP/IP configuration similar to a physical Ethernet device to
communicate with other LPARs or the external network.

1-34 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Active Memory Sharing

IBM Power Systems

Active Memory Sharing (AMS) allows multiple LPARs to

share a common pool of physical memory.
AMS intelligently assigns memory from one partition to another based
on memory page demands.
Optimizes memory utilization and provides flexible memory usage.

LPAR1 LPAR2 LPAR3

POWER
Hypervisor

AMS shared Virtual

I/O
memory pool
Server
Paging devices

Physical memory
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-25. Active Memory Sharing AN113.0

Notes:
The Active Memory Sharing (AMS) feature of PowerVM allows sharing of system memory.
In addition to traditional dedicated memory assignments to single LPARs, the administrator
has the choice of creating a memory pool that can be shared among a set of LPARs. Each
LPAR in the system can be configured to have either dedicated or shared memory.
AMS intelligently shares memory by dynamically moving it from one partition to another on
demand. This optimizes memory utilization and allows for flexible global memory usage.
Because memory utilization can be linked to processor utilization, this function
complements shared processors very well. Systems with low CPU requirements are likely
to have low memory residency requirements.
The Virtual I/O Server is required as paging partition, owning the paging devices used
when the hypervisor pages out one partitions memory to satisfy demands from other
partitions.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-35

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Live Partition Mobility

IBM Power Systems

Live Partition Mobility provides the ability to move an AIX or

Linux partition from one physical server to another compatible
server.
Useful for:
Reducing the impact of planned outages and increasing application
availability.
Workload balancing and consolidation.
Relocation of workload to enable workload.
Provision of new technology with no disruption to service (migration to
newer systems).
Requirements:
POWER6 or POWER7 systems.
LPAR must only have virtual adapters.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-26. Live Partition Mobility AN113.0

Notes:
For systems managed by an HMC, you can migrate a powered off or powered on AIX or
Linux LPAR to a different system that is managed by the same or by a different HMC.
For systems managed by the Integrated Virtualization Manager (IVM), you can migrate a
powered off or powered on partition to a different system that is managed by a different
IVM.
LPM is included in the PowerVM Enterprise Edition. It enables the ability to perform active
and inactive Live Partition Mobility operations. You can check whether these capabilities
have been enabled from the server properties or from the HMC command line.
Active Partition Mobility refers to moving a running LPAR, including its operating system
and applications, from one system to another. The LPAR and the applications running on
the LPAR do not need to be shut down.
Inactive Partition Mobility refers to moving a powered off LPAR from one system to another.

1-36 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Capacity on demand
IBM Power Systems

Capacity upgrade on demand (CUoD)

Permanent activation of processors or memory.
Trial CoD
No charge 30-day activation of processors or memory resources.
On/off CoD
Ability to activate processor or memory resources temporarily.
Utility CoD
Additional processor capacity on a temporary basis within the shared
processor pool.
Capacity BackUp Add reserve
Processors and memory temporarily resources
added to backup server.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-27. Capacity on demand AN113.0

Notes:
Introduction to capacity on demand
Capacity on demand (CoD) is the name given to a collection of optional features available
for purchase on certain models of POWER5+, POWER6, and POWER7 processor-based
servers. The main bullets in the visual list purchasing options. These options are managed
from the HMC and require a license key to activate.
Capacity upgrade on demand (CUoD) requires a purchase agreement. When processors
or memory are added, there is no ability to turn off the capacity. Processors are added in
units of one whole processor, and memory can be added in 1 GB increments.
Trial CoD is available for up to 30 contiguous days at no additional cost to allow testing and
emergency relief while the customer processes the purchase of permanent CUoD
resources.
On/Off CoD provides temporary additional processor or memory resources. Activity is
reported to IBM monthly, and there must be an On/Off Capacity agreement.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-37

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Utility CoD allows clients to use additional capacity in a minute-by-minute basis, and the
service delivers a processor minute of capacity when and where you need it. Just like
electricity is accounted for as it is used, processor minutes are accounted for at the time of
actual use. Utility CoD allows you to assign inactive processors that are installed on the
system to the shared processor pool where they can be used to satisfy the variable
workload demands of the business. The assigned processors will be treated as utility
processors that are available for use by uncapped partitions. When an uncapped partition
reaches 100% utilization and at least 10% of a utility processor is put into use during a one
minute interval, a utility processor minute will be considered consumed.
Capacity BackUp adds reserve processor and memory capacity to a backup server in the
event of an unforeseen loss of production server capability due to forces beyond your
control.
For more information, visit the Power Systems Capacity on Demand website at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/power/hardware/cod/index.html.

1-38 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

PowerVM editions
IBM Power Systems

Power VM Editions Express Standard Enterprise

Maximum VMs 3 / Server 1000 / Server 1000 / Server
VMControl, VMControl, IVM*, VMControl, IVM*,
Management
IVM, SDMC HMC, SDMC HMC, SDMC
Virtual I/O server (dual) (dual)
Suspend/Resume
NPIV
Shared processor pools
Shared storage pools
Thin provisioning
Active Memory Sharing
Live Partition Mobility

* IVM only supports a single virtual I/O server.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-28. PowerVM editions AN113.0

Notes:
PowerVM Express Edition is designed for users looking for an introduction to more
advanced virtualization features at a highly affordable price. With PowerVM Express
Edition, users can create up to three partitions on the server, leverage virtualized disk and
optical devices VIOS and even try out the Shared Processor Pool.
For users ready to get the full value out of their server, IBM offers PowerVM Standard
Edition providing the most complete virtualization functionality for AIX, IBM i and Linux
operating systems in the industry. PowerVM Standard Edition is supported on Power
Systems servers and includes features designed to allow businesses to increase system
utilization; while helping to ensure applications continue to get the resources they need.
PowerVM Enterprise Edition includes all the features of PowerVM Standard Edition plus
two new industry-leading capabilities called Active Memory Sharing and Live Partition
Mobility. Active Memory Sharing intelligently flows system memory from one partition to
another as workload demands change. Live Partition Mobility allows for the movement of a
running partition from one server to another with no application downtime, resulting in
better system utilization, improved application availability and energy savings. With Live

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-39

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Partition Mobility, planned application downtime due to regular server maintenance can be
a thing of the past.
For more informations about PowerVM editions, refer to:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/power/software/virtualization/editions/index.html.

1-40 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Partitioning concepts: Summary

IBM Power Systems

Part#1 Part#2 Part#3 Part#4 Part#5 Part#6 Part#7-11

Use thisAIX
Virtual layout
V7 for all your
Linux IBMdrawing
i AIX V6needs
AIX V7 LAN
I/O Server AIXV7/Linux
PPPPPP PPPP
PPPPPP PPP P PPPPPP
MMMMM MMMM MMM MMM M MM M M M M M
A A
AAAAAA AAAAA AAA AAAA AA AAA
Virtual LAN
Virtual I/O

O OO OO O
O O
O
AIX AIX Linux IBM i AIX AIX S SS SS S
S S
S
Kernel Kernel Kernel Kernel Kernel Kernel

Virtual Ethernet
POWER Hypervisor

HMC

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-29. Partitioning concepts: Summary AN113.0

Notes:
This visual illustrates a system with 11 partitions running different operating systems. It
shows the basic components of a system running LPARs, such as the HMC, the POWER
Hypervisor, a virtual LAN, virtual I/O, and both dedicated and shared processor partitions.
In the visual, the P= stands for processors, M= for memory, and A= for adapters in I/O
slots.
Details shown in the example in the visual:
Partitions 1-3 are using dedicated processors.
Partitions 4-11 are using the shared processor pool.
Partitions 4-11 are micro-partitions using less than a whole processor.
Partitions 1 and 6-11 have virtual Ethernet connections.
Partitions 7-11 are making use of virtual Ethernet and virtual I/O to share Ethernet
adapters and disks.
Partition 1 is a Virtual I/O Server and has the physical disks and Ethernet adapters that
the virtual clients are using.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-41

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Integrated Virtualization Manager

IBM Power Systems

Provides support for LPARs without a physical HMC:

Manages a single server
IVM software runs in the virtual I/O server partition.
Provides a subset of HMC functionality
Hypervisor has been modified to enable VIOS to manage the partitioned
system without an HMC.
Implicit rule of configuration and setup
First operating system installed
VIOS AIX AIX
must be the VIOS. Linux
IVM V7.1 V6.1
Virtual I/O server partition owns
all physical I/O
Client partitions can access
virtual optical, virtual disk,
virtual Ethernet, IVE, and console. Virtual LAN

POWER Hypervisor

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-30. Integrated Virtualization Manager AN113.0

Notes:
IVM description
IVM provides partition support without a physical HMC. The benefit is for low-end systems
to save the cost and space of a physical HMC.
The HMC functionality is provided by the IVM software running in the Virtual I/O Server
partition. The IVM can be accessed through a web browser or an HMC compatible
command-line interface.
The client partition I/O was formerly virtualized, but with POWER6 and POWER7-based
processor systems, you can assign dedicated I/O to LPARs. Only one Virtual I/O Server
partition can be installed on a system using IVM. The maximum number of partitions is 10
times the number of processors.
DLPAR for the Virtual I/O Server partition is supported using the IVM interface.

1-42 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

LPAR configuration process

IBM Power Systems

1 Create
Createplan
planfor
forusage
usagemodel
modeland
andapplications.
applications

2 Plan
Planresources
resourcesfor
forpartitions.
partitions

3 SetCreate
up HMCandand managed
configure system.
partitions

4 Create
Createand
andconfigure
configurepartitions.
partitions

5 Activate
Activatepartitions
partitionsand
andinstall
installoperating
operationsystems.
systems

6 Configure
Configureand
andtest
testservice
serviceapplications.
applications
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-31. LPAR configuration process AN113.0

Notes:
These are the overall steps for configuring partitions on a managed system. This course is
designed to follow this process from step two to the end.
Step one: Plan for usage model and applications
If you have already purchased a system, you have probably already completed step one as
part of the system sizing process.
As part of this step, you should have some idea about how to divide the applications into
partitions. You should also plan for future needs, such as partitions for development and
testing.
Step two: Plan resources for partitions
Planning the resource allocations for partitions is the most important step in the
configuration process because it will hopefully eliminate errors and multiple
reconfigurations later in the process.
Planning is crucial because, as you will see, with multiple partitions, the configuration
information becomes quite complex very quickly. This is particularly true for the network

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-43

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

configuration of your partitions and the HMC. You should plan for the normal operation of
the application in a partition and for best case and worst case scenarios (that is, extra
resources and hardware failure).
It is important to document all configurations and keep the records up to date.
One useful tool to use during this step (and step one if the sales representative uses it) is
the System Planning Tool (SPT) available from IBM. You can use this tool to plan the
resources for the partitions on the system, and then import the partition configurations from
your plan. The use of this tool is covered in this course.
Step three: Power on and set up managed system
The managed system is a term used to describe a single system with one or more
partitions.
For new managed systems, the HMC can be configured to support the managed system.
The HMC should be set up first, especially the network connection for DHCP services,
before the managed system has power applied to it (plugged in) so that the managed
system's service processor connection to the HMC is automatically set; then, when you
power on the managed system from the HMC, choose the Partition Standby power on
option. This option will allow you to configure partitions.
Step four: Create and configure partitions
You must plan, create, and configure each LPAR. Configuring a partition consists of
allocating resources and setting other configuration options.
Step five: Activate partitions and install operating systems
At this point you can activate each partition and install an operating system.
Step six: Configure and test service applications
Because IBM cannot predict how a particular system might be divided into separate
operating system environments, you might need to alter the configuration of the service
applications, such as Service Agent and Service Focal Point.

1-44 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

LPAR references
IBM Power Systems

Documentation:
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/eserver/ (IBM Systems Information Centers)
http://www.ibm.com/support/publications/us/library/
LPAR and PowerVM information
http://www.ibm.com/systems/power/software/virtualization/index.html
IBM Redbooks
http://www.redbooks.ibm.com/
Technical support Web sites:
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/support/unixservers/
http://www.software.ibm.com/webapp/set2/sas/f/vios/home.html
http://www.software.ibm.com/webapp/set2/sas/f/power5cm/power7.html
Linux Web site
http://www.ibm.com/systems/p/linux/

Web links might change over time.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-32. LPAR references AN113.0

Notes:
This list is a starting point to obtain documentation for your system. There is documentation
for your specific system model, for the HMC, for the operating systems, and for configuring
partitions. The library link shown first in the visual is a good starting point for information.
Links are provided there for the Information Centers.
There are new IBM Redbooks released frequently, particularly as a product matures.
Check the www.redbooks.ibm.com website from time to time.
The web locations shown in the visual might change over time; however, generally old links
are redirected to new ones.
Linux adapter support
For customers installing Linux on Power Systems, refer to the following website for
information on supported I/O adapters and storage devices:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/p/hardware/reports/factsfeatures.html

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-45

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

AN11 course content

IBM Power Systems

System p hardware overview

HMC
System Planning Tool
HMC maintenance
System power management
Configuring LPARs
Dynamic resource allocation

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-33. AN11 course content AN113.0

Notes:
The purpose of this visual is to provide an overview of the content and the different features
that will be covered in this class. Some of the advanced features provided in the overview
just completed in this introduction unit are not covered in that class.

1-46 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Checkpoint (1 of 3)
IBM Power Systems

1. True or False: A partition is an independent operating environment.

2. What is it that makes logical partitioning different from physical

partitioning?
a. Resource assignments are flexible.
b. Resources can be moved between partitions without a restart.
c. Partitioning is not dependent on physical system building blocks.

3. Which of the following are true for dynamic partition operations?

a. All AIX partitions on POWER6 and POWER7 processor-based systems are
capable of dynamic resource allocations.
b. Virtual I/O devices can be dynamically added or removed but not moved
between partitions.
c. Partitions do not need to be restarted to add, remove, or move resources.
d. All of the above.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-34. Checkpoint (1 of 3) AN113.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-47

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Checkpoint (2 of 3)
IBM Power Systems

4. List the types of resources that are configured in partitions.

5. What system option provides the ability to order additional

resources that can be activated when you need them?

6. Which of the following are benefits of using partitions?

a. Better management of resources across operating environments
b. Isolate applications that were all running on one system
c. Better high availability solution
d. Manage operational costs by consolidating resources

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-35. Checkpoint (2 of 3) AN113.0

Notes:

1-48 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Checkpoint (3 of 3)
IBM Power Systems

7. What is the system component that performs the resource

allocation to partitions?

8. What is the system component needed to configure

partitions, configure CoD, and provide access to virtual
consoles?

9. What is the term used for the concept of allocating sub-

processors to partitions?

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-36. Checkpoint (3 of 3) AN113.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-49

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Exercise: Introduction to partitioning

IBM Power Systems

Unit
exerc
is e

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-37. Exercise: Introduction to partitioning AN113.0

Notes:

1-50 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit summary
IBM Power Systems

Having completed this unit, you should be able to:

Describe the following terms:
Partition, logical partition (LPAR), resource
Describe the following partition concepts:
Dynamic logical partitioning
Micro-partitioning
Shared processor pool
Virtual I/O
Live Partition Mobility (LPM)
Capacity on demand (CoD)
Describe the functions of the Hardware Management Console (HMC)
Describe the functions performed by the POWER Hypervisor
Describe the overall process for configuring partitions
List references for IBM POWER6 and POWER7 processor-based
system partitioning
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 1-38. Unit summary AN113.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 1. Introduction to partitioning 1-51

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

1-52 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty Unit 2. Hardware system overview

What this unit is about

This unit describes the system components and location code formats
for the LPAR-capable IBM POWER7 processor-based systems.

What you should be able to do

After completing this unit, you should be able to:
Identify basic architecture elements and hardware components of
POWER7 processor-based systems
Discuss the different POWER7 server options: Express versus
Enterprise
Describe the functions of the service processor
Describe physical location code conventions
Use AIX commands to view location codes

How you will check your progress

Accountability:
Checkpoint questions
Machine exercises

References
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/eserver/
IBM System p and AIX Information Center

Redpapers:
IBM BladeCenter Technical Overview and Introduction
IBM POWER 710 and 730 Technical Overview and Introduction
IBM POWER 720 and 740 Technical Overview and Introduction
IBM POWER 750 and 755 Technical Overview and Introduction
IBM POWER 770 and 780 Technical Overview and Introduction
IBM POWER 795 Technical Overview and Introduction
http://www.ibm.com/systems/power/hardware/775/
IBM Power 775 Supercomputer

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-1
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Unit objectives
IBM Power Systems

After completing this unit, you should be able to:

Identify basic architecture elements and hardware
components of IBM POWER7 processor-based systems
Discuss the different POWER7 server options: Express
versus Enterprise
Describe the functions of the service processor
Describe physical location code conventions
Use AIX commands to view location codes

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-1. Unit objectives AN113.0

Notes:

2-2 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

IBM POWER6 processor-based systems

IBM Power Systems

IBM System p and IBM System i unification:

Same hardware platform:
Single product set
Servers, adapters and I/O components
Support AIX V5.3, AIX V6.1, IBM i 5.4, IBM i 6.1, and Linux (RHEL4, RHEL5, SLES 9,
and SLES10)
All support PowerVM editions
Entry systems: One- to eight-way processor systems
Examples: Power 520, Power 550, BladeCenter JS12, BladeCenter JS22
Mid-range systems: Two- to 16-way processor systems
Example: Power 570
High end systems: Eight- to 64-way processor systems
Examples: Power 575, Power 595

g
Scalin
n e - to 64-way
O s
system
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-2. IBM POWER6 processor-based systems AN113.0

Notes:
IBM Power Systems: A single, energy efficient and easy-to-deploy platform for all of your
UNIX, Linux, and IBM i applications.
Again with POWER6 we are breaking down barriers and pushing the envelope of where
the technology can go. POWER6 processors most visible feature is the speed with
ultra-high frequencies - breaking the 5 GHz barrier. Power Systems are shipped with 3.5
GHz, 4.2 GHz, 4.7 GHz, and 5.0 GHz dual-core chips.
One of the keys to our performance has always been balanced system design -- and with
POWER 6 we have doubled the memory bandwidth and 3X the SMP and I/O bandwidth.
But POWER6 is not just about performance. Substantial focus has been put on reliability
and availability as well. System z key reliability features have been brought to System p
such as the Processor Instruction Retry or the Storage keys.
No more System i or System p, only Power Systems where you can select to run AIX,
Linux, or IBM i. All system models support all three operating systems.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-3
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

All Power Systems servers can utilize logical partitioning (LPAR) technology implemented
through System p virtualization technologies, the operating system (OS), and a Hardware
Management Console (HMC), IBM Systems Director Management Console (SDMC), or
Integrated Virtualization Manager (IVM). Dynamic LPAR allows clients to dynamically
allocate many system resources to application partitions without rebooting.
PowerVM Editions
In addition to the base virtualization that is standard on every System p server, three
optional virtualization features are available on the server: PowerVM Express Edition,
PowerVM Standard Edition (formerly Advanced POWER Virtualization (APV) Standard),
and PowerVM Enterprise Edition (formerly APV Enterprise).
POWER6 integrated hardware accelerators
Introduced with the POWER6 processor design is hardware decimal floating-point support
improving the performance of the basic mathematical calculations of financial transactions
that occur regularly on todays business computers. This will improve the performance of
decimal calculations used by financial and retail companies up to seven times whats done
in software today. The POWER6 processor also includes an AltiVec SIMD accelerator,
which helps to improve the performance of multi-media and 3D modeling algorithms used
primarily in High performance computing.
POWER6 EnergyScale Technology
The IBM POWER6 architecture with EnergyScale technology provides features such as
power trending, power-saving, capping of maximum power, and thermal measurement.
These features are enabled using IBM Systems Director Active Energy Manager software
within the IBM Director console. They measure energy use and direct policies toward the
energy-efficient operation of the server, while the underlying hardware automatically
adjusts to deliver the desired operating solution. The POWER6 chip is also designed to
conserve power and reduce heat generated by the server. A feature called nap mode
enables processor clocks to be dynamically turned off when there is no useful work to be
done and turned back on when there are instructions to be executed.
Other features
Other features introduced with POWER6 processor-based technology include an
Integrated Virtual Ethernet adapter standard on most systems. The Processor Instruction
Retry feature automatically monitoring the POWER6 processor and, if needed, restarting
the processor workload without disruption to the application.

2-4 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty POWER6 processor characteristics

Ultra-high frequency dual-core chip: Up to 5.0 GHz
Seven-way superscalar, two-way SMT core
Up to five instr. for one thread; up to two for other
Nine execution units
2LS, 2FP, 2FX, 1VMX, 1DP
790M transistors, 341 mm2 die
Up to 64-core SMP systems
2x4 MB on-chip L2 point of coherency
On-chip L3 directory and controller
Two memory controllers on-chip
CMOS 65nm lithography, SOI Cu
High-speed elastic bus interface at 2:1 freq
Full error checking and recovery
Dynamic power saving
Advanced Clock gating

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-5
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

POWER7 system highlights

IBM Power Systems
Balance system design
Cache, memory, and I/O
POWER7 processor technology:
Sixth implementation of multi-core design
On chip L2 and L3 caches
POWER7 System architecture:
Blades to high end offerings
Enhances memory implementation
PCIe, SAS, and SATA
Built in virtualization:
Memory expansion
VMControl
Green technologies:
Processor nap and sleep mode
Memory power down support
Aggressive power save and capping modes
700

Availability: 600

Processor instruction retry

500

400

Alternate process recovery 300

200

Concurrent add and services 100

0
JS23 JS43 520 550 750 560 570/16 570/32 770 780 595

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-3. POWER7 system highlights AN113.0

Notes:
This is an overview of the products and features for which details will be provided in
subsequent slides.

2-6 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

POWER7 processor chip

IBM Power Systems
Cores: Eight (four / six core options)
Local SMP Links 567mm2 technology:
45 nm lithography, Cu, SOI, eDRAM
POWER7 POWER7 POWER7 POWER7
CORE F
A
CORE CORE CORE Transistors: 1.2 B:
S Equivalent function of 2.7B
L2 Cache T L2 Cache L2 Cache L2 Cache

L3 REGION
eDRAM efficiency
MC0 L3 Cache and MC1 Eight processor cores:
Chip Interconnect Twelve execution units per core
L2 Cache L2 Cache L2 Cache L2 Cache Four-way SMT per core up to four
threads per core
POWER7 POWER7 POWER7 POWER7
CORE CORE CORE CORE 32 threads per chip
L1: 32 KB I cache / 32 KB D cache
Remote SMP & I/O Links L2: 256 KB per core
L3: Shared 32 MB on chip eDRAM
Dual DDR3 memory controllers
Binary compatibility with 90 GB/s memory bandwidth per chip
POWER6 Scalability up to 32 sockets:
360 GB/s SMP bandwidth/chip
20,000 coherent operations in flight

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-4. POWER7 processor chip AN113.0

Notes:
This visual depicts the POWER7 processor chip (that is, the processor module). In this
generation of the POWER7 processor module, a breakthrough in material engineering and
microprocessor fabrication has enabled IBM to implement the L3 cache in eDRAM and
place it on the POWER7 processor die.
The L3 cache is critical to a balanced design, as is the ability to provide good signaling
between the L3 cache and other elements of the hierarchy such as the L2 cache or SMP
interconnect.
The on-chip L3 cache is organized into separate areas with differing latency
characteristics.
The processor chip could contain up to eight processor cores. Each processor core is
associated with a Fast Local Region of L3 cache (FLR-L3) but also has access to other L3
cache regions as shared L3 cache. Additionally, each core can negotiate to use the FLR-L3
cache associated with another core, depending on reference patterns. Data can also be
cloned to be stored in more than one core's FLR-L3 cache, again depending on reference

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-7
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

patterns. This intelligent cache management enables the POWER7 processor to optimize
the access to L3 cache lines and minimize overall cache latencies.
This eDRAM (Embedded DRAMS) permits much wider buses and higher operation
speeds, and due to the higher density of DRAM in comparison to SRAM, larger amounts of
memory can potentially be used.
Please note that throughout this unit, the terms POWER7 processor module and the
POWER7 processor chip are used interchangeably.

2-8 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

POWER7 modes: General

IBM Power Systems

POWER6 (and POWER6+) POWER7 Customer value

Throughput performance,
Two-thread SMT Four-thread SMT
processor core utilization

VMX-Vector VSX (Vector Scalar

High performance computing
Multimedia Extension or AltiVec Extension)

Barrier synchronization Enhanced barrier synchronization High performance computing

Fixed 128-byte array; Kernel Variable sized array; User shared parallel programming
extension access memory access synchronization facility

32-core and 128-thread scaling Performance and scalability for

64-core and 128-thread large scale-up single system image
64-core and 256-thread scaling
scaling workloads (such as OLTP, ERP
256-core and 1024-thread scaling scale-up, WPAR consolidation)

EnergyScale CPU idle and folding

EnergyScale CPU idle Improved energy efficiency
with NAP and SLEEP

Improved system performance for

Three-tier memory, micropartition
Affinity OFF by default system images spanning sockets
affinity
and nodes

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-5. POWER7 modes: General AN113.0

Notes:
The table in the visual identifies the features available with each compatibility mode as well
as the customer benefit.
Intelligent threads
The POWER7 processor features intelligent threads that can vary based on the workload
demand. The system either automatically selects (or the system administrator can
manually select) whether a workload benefits from dedicating as much capability as
possible to a single thread of work, or if the workload benefits more from having capability
spread across two or four threads of work. With more threads, the POWER7 processor can
deliver more total capacity as more tasks are accomplished in parallel. With fewer threads,
those workloads that need very fast individual tasks can get the performance they need for
maximum benefit. There will be later discussions of 4-thread SMT and the energy
management enhancements.
There is a significant change to the architecture for vector based computing; the VMX unit
has been replaced with the VSX unit.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-9
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

What is VMX? The VMX technology provides a model that accelerates the performance of
various software applications based primarily on vector and matrix operations. The vector
processing technology is a short vector parallel architecture that extends the instruction set
architecture (ISA) of the PowerPC.
VMX is based on separate vector/SIMD-style execution units, which have high data
parallelism. The vector processing technology operations can perform on multiple data
elements in a single instruction.
VMX technology supports the following audio and visual applications:
Voice over IP
Speech recognition
Voice/sound processing
Communications
2D and 3D graphics
Image and video processing
Array number processing
Cellular base station processing
High bandwidth data communication
Some VSX highlights:
Two VSX units that can each handle two double precision FP instructions
Eight FLOPS per cycles
VSX units can also handle four single precision instructions per cycle
VSX instruction set support for vector and scalar instructions
What is SIMD? It describes computers with multiple processing elements that perform the
same operation on multiple data simultaneously. Thus, such machines exploit data level
parallelism.
An application that might take advantage of SIMD is one where the same value is being
added (or subtracted) to a large number of data points, a common operation in many
multimedia applications. One example would be changing the brightness of an image.
Each pixel of an image consists of three values for the brightness of the red, green and
blue portions of the color. To change the brightness, the R, G and B values are read from
memory, a value is added (or subtracted) from them, and the resulting values are written
back out to memory.
With a SIMD processor, there are two improvements to this process. For one, the data is
understood to be in blocks, and a number of values can be loaded all at once. Instead of a
series of instructions saying get this pixel, now get the next pixel, a SIMD processor will
have a single instruction that effectively says get lots of pixels (lots is a number that varies
from design to design). For a variety of reasons, this can take much less time than getting
each pixel individually, like with traditional CPU design.
POWER5+ uses out-of-order execution; POWER6 however uses mostly in-order
execution. POWER7 uses out of order execution. This allows the processor to avoid a stall
that occur when the data needed to perform an operation is unavailable.

2-10 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

POWER7 modes for AIX

IBM Power Systems

Max cores
AIX and threads supported
Release/TL
POWER6 POWER7
AIX 5.3
64 / 128 N/A
(all TLs supported)
AIX 6.1 TL2, TL3 64 / 128 N/A
AIX 6.1 TL4 64 / 128 64 / 256
AIX 6.1 TL5 64 / 128 64 / 256
AIX 7.1 64 / 128 256 / 1024

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-6. POWER7 modes for AIX AN113.0

Notes:
The table in this visual identifies the maximum number of cores and hardware threads per
system.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-11
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

POWER7 TurboCore mode

IBM Power Systems

TurboCore chips: Four available TurboCore

cores. POWER7 chip
Aggregation of L3 caches of
Core Core Core Core
unused cores. P
O S
TurboCore chips have 2X the L3 W
E
L2 L2 L2 L2 M
cache per chip available. R P
Four TurboCore chips L3 = 32 MB G 32 MB F
X L3 Cache A
Chips run at higher frequency. B
R
Power reduction of unused cores. B I
U L2 L2 L2 L2
With reboot, the system can be C
S
reconfigured to eight core mode. Core Core Core Core

ASM menus
Memory Interface

TurboCores Unused
core
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-7. POWER7 TurboCore mode AN113.0

Notes:
The Power 780 and Power 795 systems can be booted to run in two modes: MaxCore
mode and TurboCore mode.
MaxCore mode: Each 8-core Single Chip Module (SCM) operates with 32 MB of L3
cache.
TurboCore mode: Each 8-core SCM operates with up to four active cores and 32 MB of
L3 cache. Thus, in TurboCore mode, there are fewer cores running with a higher
core-to-L3-cache ratio (twice the L3 cache per core available).

2-12 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

EnergyScale
IBM Power Systems

EnergyScale is an IBM trademark. It consists of a built-in thermal power

management device (TPMD) card and Power Executive software.
IBM Systems Director is also required to manage EnergyScale functions.
EnergyScale is used to dynamically optimize the processor performance
versus processor power and system workload.
IBM Systems Director is also required to manage AEM functions and
supports the following functions:
Power trending
Thermal reporting
Static energy saver mode
Dynamic energy saver mode
Energy capping
Soft energy capping
Processor nap
Energy optimized fan control
Altitude input
Processor folding
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-8. EnergyScale AN113.0

Notes:
Energy trending
EnergyScale provides continuous collection of real-time server energy consumption. This
energy usage data can be displayed or exported by IBM Systems Director Active Energy
Manager.
Administrators can use such information to predict data center energy consumption at
various times of the day, week, or month.
Thermal reporting
A measured ambient temperature and a calculated exhaust heat index temperature can be
displayed from Active Energy Manager. This information can help identify data center
hot-spots that need attention.
Power Saver mode (or Static Energy Saver mode)
This feature must be manually enabled/disabled. Static Energy Saver lowers the processor
frequency and voltage, reducing the energy consumption of the system while still delivering

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-13
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

predictable performance. This percentage is predetermined to be within a safe operating

limit and is not user configurable.
Energy Saver could be enabled based on regular variations in workloads, such as
predictable dips in utilization over night, or over weekends. It can be used to reduce peak
energy consumption, which can lower the cost of all power used.
Dynamic Power Saver mode
Dynamic Energy Saver varies processor frequency and voltage based on the utilization of
the processors. The user must configure this setting from IBM Systems Director Active
Energy Manager.
Processor frequency and utilization are inversely proportional for most workloads, implying
that as the frequency of a processor increases, its utilization decreases, given a constant
workload. Dynamic Energy Saver takes advantage of this relationship to detect
opportunities to save power, based on measured real-time system utilization. When a
system is idle, the system firmware will lower the frequency and voltage to Static Energy
Saver values. When fully utilized, the maximum frequency will vary, depending on whether
the user favors power savings or system performance. If an administrator prefers energy
savings and a system is fully-utilized, the system will reduce the maximum frequency to
95% of nominal values. If performance is favored over energy consumption, the maximum
frequency will be at least 100% of nominal.
Dynamic Energy Saver is mutually exclusive with Static Power Saver mode. Only one of
these modes can be enabled at a given time.
Power Capping (or Energy Capping)
It is important to understand the differences between power capping and power savings.
Power capping is used to allow the user to allocate less power and cooling to a system.
This can help save on datacenter infrastructure costs, and then potentially allow more
servers to be put into an existing infrastructure. Power savings is used to put the server into
a mode that consumes less energy.
Power Capping enforces a user specified limit on energy consumption. The user must set
and enable an energy cap from the Active Energy Manager user interface. In most data
centers and other installations, when a machine is installed, a certain amount of energy is
allocated to it. Generally, the amount is what is considered to be a safe value, and it
typically has a large margin of reserved, extra energy that is never used. This is called the
margined power. The main purpose of the energy cap is not to save energy but rather to
allow a data center operator the ability to reallocate energy from current systems to new
systems by reducing the margin assigned to the existing machines.
Soft Power Capping
There are two power ranges into which the power cap can be set. When a power cap is set
in the guaranteed range (Power Capping), the system is guaranteed to use less energy
than the cap setting. Setting a energy cap in this region allows for the recovery of the
margined power, but in many cases cannot be used to save energy. Soft power capping

2-14 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty extends the allowed energy capping range further, beyond a region that can be guaranteed
in all configurations and conditions. If the energy management goal is to meet a particular
energy consumption limit, then soft energy capping is the mechanism to use.
Processor Nap
The IBM POWER7 processor uses a low-power mode called Nap that stops processor
execution when there is no work to do on that processor core. The latency of exiting Nap
falls within a partition dispatch (context switch) such that the hypervisor firmware can use it
as a general purpose idle state. When the operating system detects that a processor
thread is idle, it yields control of a hardware thread to the hypervisor. The hypervisor
immediately puts the thread into Nap. When the operating system yields control of the
second thread and the processor core belongs to a dedicated processor partition, the
second thread enters Nap mode.
Energy-Optimized Fan Control and Altitude Input
The Power Systems firmware will dynamically adjust fan speed based on energy
consumption, altitude, ambient temperature, and energy savings modes. Systems are
designed to operate in worst-case environments, in hot ambient temperatures, at high
altitudes, and with high power components. In a typical case, one or more of these
constraints are not valid. When no power savings setting is enabled, fan speed is based on
ambient temperature, and assumes a high-altitude environment. When a power savings
setting is enforced (either Static Energy Saver or Dynamic Energy Saver) fan speed will
vary based on power consumption, ambient temperature, and altitude (if available).
System altitude can also be set (Active Energy Manager). If no altitude is set, system will
assume a default value of 350 meters above sea level.
Processor folding
Technique that dynamically adjusts, over the short-term, the number of processors
available for dispatch to match the number of processors demanded by the workload. As
the workload increases, the number of processors made available increases; as the
workload decreases, the number of processors made available decreases. Processor
folding increases energy savings during periods of low to moderate workload because
unavailable processors remain in low-power idle states longer.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-15
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

POWER7 offerings: Express versus Enterprise

IBM Power Systems

IBM Power Blade Express servers

Power 710 Express

Power 730 Express

Power 720 Express

Power 740 Express

Power 750 Express

Power 755

Power 770
Power 780 Power 775
Supercomputer Power 795

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-9. POWER7 offerings: Express versus Enterprise AN113.0

Notes:
The main difference between the Express and Enterprise models is that the Enterprise
servers include redundant components and concurrent repair for higher availability and
protection of the system.
Check the Power hardware web site for more details:
http://www.ibm.com/systems/power/hardware/index.html

2-16 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Power Blade Express

IBM Power Systems

PS704 PS703 PS702 PS701 PS700

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-10. Power Blade Express AN113.0

Notes:
Built on the proven foundation of the IBM BladeCenter family and featuring 4, 8,16 or 32
POWER7 cores, the BladeCenter PS700, PS701, PS702, PS703 and PS704 Express
blades are ideal for scalable workloads that demand both cost and energy efficiency in a
flexible package.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-17
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Power Blade Express at a glance

IBM Power Systems

PS700 PS701 PS702 PS703 PS704

Power7 Four 64-bit 3.0 Eight 64-bit 3.0 16 64-bit 3.0 GHz 16 64-bit 2.4 GHz 32 64-bit 2.4 GHz
Processor GHz GHz
cores
Level 2 (L2) 256 KB per 256 KB per 256 KB per 256 KB per 256 KB per
cache processor core processor core processor core processor core processor core

Level 3 (L3) 4 MB per 4 MB per 4 MB per 4 MB per 4 MB per

cache processor core processor core processor core processor core processor core

Memory 8 GB / 64 GB per 16 GB / 128 GB 32 GB / 128 GB 16 GB / 256 GB 32 GB / 512 GB

(std/max) blade per blade per blade per blade per blade

Internal disk Two 300 or 600 One 300 or 600 Two 300 or 600 One 300 or 600 Two 300 or 600
storage GB 2.5" SAS non GB 2.5" SAS non GB 2.5 SAS non GB 2.5 SAS non GB 2.5 SAS non
hot-swappable hot-swappable hot-swappable hot-swappable hot-swappable
HDD HDD HDD HDD or two 1.8 HDD or four 1.8
177 GB SSD 177 GB SSD
Networking IVE dual gigabit IVE dual gigabit IVE quad gigabit Integrated dual Integrated dual
gigabit Ethernet gigabit Ethernet
ports (virtualized ports (virtualized
Ethernet provided Ethernet provided
by PowerVM by PowerVM
VIOS VIOS

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-11. Power Blade Express at a glance AN113.0

Notes:
The visual highlights the system features of the Power Blade Express servers.

2-18 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 710 / 730 Express

IBM Power Systems

Size: 2U

6-Small Form Factor (SFF) bays

with disk (or disk and tape)

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-12. Power 710 and 730 Express AN113.0

Notes:
The Power 710 Express server is a 1-socket server supporting 4-core, 6-core or 8-core
POWER7 processor modules in a dense 2U rack-optimized form factor.
The Power 730 Express server is a two-socket server offering 8, 12 or 16 POWER7 cores
in a dense, 2U rack-optimized form factor.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-19
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Power 710 Express at a glance

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-13. Power 710 Express at a glance AN113.0

Notes:
The visual highlights the system features of the Power 710 Express servers.

2-20 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 730 Express at a glance

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-14. Power 730 Express at a glance AN113.0

Notes:
The visual highlights the system features of the Power 730 Express servers.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-21
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Power 710 / 730 Express: Rear view

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-15. Power 710 / 730 Express: Rear view AN113.0

Notes:
The visual shows the rear view of the server showing, among other things, the different I/O
options.

2-22 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 720 / 740 Express

IBM Power Systems

Power 740 Power 720 / 740

rack-mount tower

Size: 4U

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-16. Power 720 / 740 Express AN113.0

Notes:
The Power 720 Express server is a 1-socket server supporting 4-core, 6-core or 8-core
POWER7 processor modules in a flexible rack-optimized or tower form factor.
The Power 740 Express server is a 1- or 2-socket server supporting 4, 6, 8, 12 or 16
POWER7 cores in a flexible rack-optimized form factor.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-23
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Power 720 Express at a glance

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-17. Power 720 Express at a glance AN113.0

Notes:
The visual highlights the system features of the Power 720 Express servers.

2-24 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 740 Express at a glance

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-18. Power 740 Express at a glance AN113.0

Notes:
The visual highlights the system features of the Power 740 Express server.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-25
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Power 740 Express: Rear view

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-19. Power 740 Express: Rear view AN113.0

Notes:
The visual shows the rear view of the server showing, among other things, the different I/O
options.

2-26 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 750 Express

IBM Power Systems

rack-mount

Size: 4U

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-20. Power 750 Express AN113.0

Notes:
The Power 750 Express server is a 1 to 4-socket server supporting up to 32 cores using
POWER7 6-core and 8-core processor modules.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-27
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Power 750 Express at a glance

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-21. Power 750 Express at a glance AN113.0

Notes:
The visual highlights the system features of the Power 750 Express server.

2-28 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 750 Express: Front view

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-22. Power 750 Express: Front view AN113.0

Notes:
The front view of the server is shown in the visual.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-29
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Power 750 Express: Rear view

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-23. Power 750: Rear view AN113.0

Notes:
The rear view of the server shows the different I/O options.

2-30 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 750 Express: Split backplane

IBM Power Systems

Power 750 split backplane feature:

Four SFF disk drives are assigned to the integrated SAS controller
Four SFF disk drives are assigned to the external rear SAS port
AIX/Linux, not IBM i

SAS port
SAS port AI-cable
750 system < front
Adapter

AI-cable

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-24. Power 750 Express: Split backplane AN113.0

Notes:
The Power 750 Express server supports the split backplane mode. If configured, the four
small form factor (SFF) disk drives are assigned to the integrated SAS controller, and the
four SFF disk drives are assigned to the external rear SAS port.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-31
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

I/O drawer availability for Power

710/720/730/740/750 Express
IBM Power Systems

Enclosures and 710 730 720 740 750

expansion units Express Express Express Express Express
12X I/O Drawer PCIe,
SFF disk X X X
(#5802)
12X I/O Drawer PCIe,
No disk X X X
(#5877)
12X I/O Drawer PCI-X
DDR X X X
(#5796)
EXP 12S SAS Drawer
X X X X X
(#5886)

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-25. I/O drawer availability for Power 710/720/730/740/750 Express AN113.0

Notes:
The table shows the I/O drawer availability for Power 710, 720, 730, 740, and 750 Express.

2-32 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 755
IBM Power Systems

rack-mount

Size: 4U

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-26. Power 755 AN113.0

Notes:
The Power 755 is a 4-socket, 32-core server with outstanding performance in a dense 4U
rack-optimized package. Using 12X InfiniBand adapters up to 64 Power 755 nodes, each
with 32 cores, can be clustered together providing up to 2,048 POWER7 cores.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-33
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Power 755 at a glance

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-27. Power 755 at a glance AN113.0

Notes:
The visual highlights the system features of the Power 755 server.

2-34 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 755 HPC cluster

IBM Power Systems

For high performance computing, a 64-node cluster could be

configured
With 32 processor cores per node

Data center in a rack

Up to 10 nodes per rack

IB-DDR
Interconnect
Air cooled

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-28. Power 755 HPC cluster AN113.0

Notes:
The POWER7 755 can be configured to support clustered environments enabling HPC
applications.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-35
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Power 770
IBM Power Systems

rack-mount

Size: 4U

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-29. Power 770 AN113.0

Notes:
Easily scale up to 64 cores with the IBM Power 770. Unique IBM modular SMP architecture
lets you add more powerful POWER7 processing capability exactly when needed.
Innovative RAS features and leadership virtualization capabilities make the 770 well suited
as a midrange application or database server, or for server consolidation. And the flexibility
to use the leading-edge AIX, IBM i and Linux operating systems broadens the application
offerings available and increases the ways clients can manage growth, complexity and risk.

2-36 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 770 at a glance

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-30. Power 770 at a glance AN113.0

Notes:
The visual highlights the system features of the Power 770 server.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-37
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Power 775 supercomputing

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-31. Power 775 supercomputing AN113.0

Notes:
The IBM Power 775 supercomputing server is designed for organizations that require a
highly scalable system with extreme parallel processing performance and dense, modular
packaging. Use it in clustered configurations of as few as 256 processor cores or in
world-class supercomputer configurations of hundreds of thousands of processors.
Combined with specialized software from IBM, this system is designed to perform and
represents the latest Power technology available.

2-38 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 775 supercomputing at a glance

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-32. Power 775 supercomputing at a glance AN113.0

Notes:
The visual highlights the system features of the Power 775 server.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-39
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Power 780
IBM Power Systems

Maint coverage
24 X 7
PowerCare support

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-33. Power 780 AN113.0

Notes:
Easily scale up to 64 cores with the IBM Power 780. Unique IBM modular SMP architecture
lets you add more powerful POWER7 processing capability exactly when needed.
Innovative RAS features and leadership virtualization capabilities make the 780 well suited
as an application or database server, or for server consolidation. And the flexibility to use
the leading-edge AIX, IBM i and Linux operating systems broadens the application
offerings available and increases the ways clients can manage growth, complexity and risk.

2-40 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 780 at a glance

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-34. Power 780 at a glance AN113.0

Notes:
The visual highlights the system features of the Power 780 server.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-41
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Power 770/780: Front view

IBM Power Systems

Fans

Fabric
interconnects

DVD

Six SFF bays Op panel

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-35. Power 770/780: Front view AN113.0

Notes:
The front view of the server is shown in the visual.

2-42 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 770/780: Rear view

IBM Power Systems

FSP
connectors

HMC
HMC Two GX++ bays
ports
Ports
P P P P P P
C C C C C C Two power
I I I I I I supplies
e e e e e e

SPCN
ports

IVE USB Serial

ports ports port

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-36. Power 770/780: Rear view AN113.0

Notes:
This visual depicts the rear view of a Power 770 or 780. The focus here is the I/O and the
Power/Thermal subsystems; from the GX++ and PCIe slots to the HMC ports connections.
This also shows the System Power Control Network (SPCN) connections as well.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-43
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Power 795
IBM Power Systems

Maint coverage
24 X 7
PowerCare support

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-37. Power 795 AN113.0

Notes:
The IBM Power 795 server uses 64-bit POWER7 eight-core processor technology in up to
256-core configurations with PowerVM virtualization. This enterprise Power server offers
leadership performance and massive scalability, along with the reliability, manageability
and security features needed to consolidate AIX, IBM i, and Linux applications in the
largest and most demanding data center environments.

2-44 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 795 at a glance

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-38. Power 795 at a glance AN113.0

Notes:
The visual highlights the system features of the Power 795 server.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-45
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Power 795 layout

IBM Power Systems

Bulk
power
supply Network hub

Media drawer Light panel

Node
Processor/memory controller (2X)
Book nodes

System
Midplane controller (2X)

Clock (2X)
I/O hub
Up to four per node

I/O drawers (3X)

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-39. Power 795 layout AN113.0

Notes:
The visual depicts the major Power 795 subsystems. The power subsystem is at the top of
the frame, the processor subsystems (that is, the CEC) is in the middle and I/O subsystem
is at the bottom.

2-46 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Power 795 processor / memory book node

IBM Power Systems

TPMD DCA bulk power

(2)
DIMMs
DCA bulk power

GX bus
Node cntrl P7 P7 DIMMs
Node cntrl
GX bus
GX bus
GX bus
P7 P7
Four POWER7 chips / up to 1 TB memory
Four GX Ports / two node controllers
32 DIMM slots per node
Two TPMD / node

DIMM size Memory speed Offering size Max memory

8 GB 1067 MHz 32 GB 2 TB
16 GB 1067 MHz 64 GB 4 TB
32 GB 1067 MHz 128 GB 8 TB
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-40. Power 795 processor / memory book node AN113.0

Notes:
The visual shows a diagram of Power 795 processor book as well as the possible memory
DIMM size options that you can configure. Also notice the positioning of the four POWER7
chips and their associated memory slots. The four GX ports are mounted in the front of the
Processor modules whereas the two Distributed Controller Assemblies (DCA) are housed
in the back.
Two standard Thermal Power Management Devices (TPMD) are displayed as well.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-47
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

I/O drawer availability for Power 755/770/780/795

IBM Power Systems

Enclosures and expansion

755 770 780 795
units
12X I/O Drawer PCIe, SFF
disk X X
(#5802)
12X I/O Drawer PCIe , No
disk X X
(#5877)
12X I/O Drawer PCI-X DDR
X X
(#5796 and #7314)
12X I/O Drawer PCI-X
X
(#5797 and #5798)
12X I/O drawer PCIe
X
(#5803 and #5873)
EXP 12S SAS Drawer
X X X X
(#5886)
EXP 24 SAS Drawer
X X
(#5786, #5787, #7031)

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-41. I/O drawer availability for Power 755/770/780/795 AN113.0

Notes:
The table shows the I/O drawer availability for Power 755, 770, 780, and 795 servers.

2-48 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty
I/O drawer example: 12X I/O Drawer PCI-X DDR
(#5796)
IBM Power Systems

Rear view
(No disk drives in front)

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-42. I/O drawer example: 12X I/O Drawer PCI-X DDR (#5796) AN113.0

Notes:
The PCI-DDR 12X Expansion Drawer (#5796) is a 4U (EIA units) drawer and mounts in a
19-inch rack.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-49
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

I/O drawer example: 12X I/O Drawer PCIe, SFF

disk (#5802)
IBM Power Systems

front view rear view

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-43. I/O drawer example: 12X I/O Drawer PCIe, SFF disk (#5802) AN113.0

Notes:
The 12X I/O Drawer PCIe, SFF disk (#5802) is a 19-inch I/O and storage drawer. It
provides a 4U-tall (EIA units) drawer containing 10 PCIe-based I/O adapter slots and 18
SAS hot-swap Small Form Factor disk bays, which can be used for either HDD or SSD.

2-50 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

I/O location codes

IBM Power Systems

Types of location codes:

Physical location codes refer
to a specific component.
A physical location code is a
sequence of location labels that,
when followed in order, leads to
the resource.

Operating system location codes also refer to components and use a

different convention.
Example hdisk0: 03-08-00-3,0 -> SCSI disk drive
Example hdisk0: 00-08-00 -> SAS disk drive

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-44. I/O location codes AN113.0

Notes:
A physical location code is a sequence of location labels that, when followed in order, lead
to the location. On a given system, a resource has only one physical location code. It is
necessary to interpret physical location codes in a variety of situations. Service error logs,
partition configuration screens, and inventory reports all report location codes.
Operating systems also refer to devices by their own location codes. It is often important to
translate between the operating system location code and the physical location code; for
example, if you want to determine which physical disk to set as the boot disk.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-51
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Physical location code convention

IBM Power Systems

Physical location code format

Utttt.mmm.sssssss-additional device information

Unit Machine type . Unit Model Number . Unit serial number

Example physical location code

U78A0.001.DNWGCP5-P1-C1-T1
P1 specifies I/O planar 1.
C1 specifies card slot 1.
After a card slot, a T followed by a number specifies a particular port.
If no card slot, a T followed by a number specifies an integrated slot.
An L followed by a number specifies a logical path identifier specific to the
protocol being used (for example, SCSI identifiers).

SAS adapter example

U78A0.001.DNWGCP5-P1-T9 PCI-X266 Planar 3Gb SAS adapter

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-45. Physical location code convention AN113.0

Notes:
Physical location code format
Servers (system unit and expansion units) use physical location codes to provide mapping
of replaceable units. Location codes are produced by the server's firmware, which
structures them so that they can be broken down to identify specific parts in a system.
Physical location codes are formed by concatenating one or more location labels together.
Location labels start at the largest or most general resource (the unit) and proceed to the
most specific in order of containment. The location labels are separated by dashes (-).
Drawers for which the system can obtain the machine type, model, and serial number will
have a unit location code composed of the machine type and serial number.
Unit numbers
These are the unit numbers that you will see in the location codes for the components in
the system drawer or the central electronics complex (CEC). For PCI-X slots in attached
I/O drawers, the unit number of the drawer will be used.

2-52 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

View location codes: From the HMC GUI

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-46. View location codes: From the HMC GUI AN113.0

Notes:
The visual presents the HMC GUI properties panel showing the location codes of the
physical I/O resources for a managed system.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-53
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

View location codes: From AIX

IBM Power Systems

Use lscfg to see physical location codes:

Fibre Channel adapter
For hdisk0
# lscfg | grep hdisk0
* hdisk0 U5877.001.M09J13D-P1-C3-T1-W500507680140B855-L0 MPIO IBM
2145 FC Disk Port T1 of the Fibre Channel
adapter
For Ethernet adapter
# lscfg | grep en
Model Implementation: Multiple Processor, PCI bus
+ ent0 U78A0.001.DNWK37K-P1-C6-T2 Logical Host
Ethernet Port (lp-hea)
Ethernet controller

Use lsdev to see AIX location code:

For disk drive
# lsdev -Cc disk
hdisk0 Available 00-00-02 MPIO IBM 2145 FC Disk
For Ethernet adapter
# lsdev | grep ent
ent0 Available Logical Host Ethernet Port (lp-hea)

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-47. View location codes: From AIX AN113.0

Notes:
The AIX commands in the visual show how you can view both physical location codes and
the correlating AIX codes.

2-54 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Flexible service processor

IBM Power Systems

Functions of the flexible service processor include:

System initialization
Connection to the HMC
Web-based Advanced System Management Interface (ASMI) for setting system flags
Hardware error detection
Connects to HMC over network:
Server processors IP address set by HMC DHCP server
This can be changed through ASM interface.
To find IP address of a service processor connected to an HMC, use one of the
following HMC commands:
$ lssyscfg -r sys -F name,ipaddr,state
sys404,192.168.255.35,Operating
$ lssysconn -r all
resource_type=sys,type_model_serial_num=8233-
E8B*10000AP,sp=primary,sp_phys_loc=U78A0.001.DNWK37K-
P1,ipaddr=192.168.255.35,alt_ipaddr=unavailable,state=Connected

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-48. Flexible service processor AN113.0

Notes:
The flexible service processor (FSP) performs many vital reliability, availability, and
serviceability (RAS) functions. The service processor is an embedded unit running the
service processor internal operating system, which contains programs and device drivers.
The service processor gives the means to diagnose, check status, and sense operational
conditions of a remote system, even when the main processor is inoperable. The service
processor enables firmware and operating system surveillance, several remote power
controls, environmental monitoring, reset, and boot features, remote maintenance and
diagnostic activities.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-55
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Advanced System Management interface (1 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-49. Advanced System Management interface (1 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
With the system in power standby mode, or with an operating system in control of the
machine, or controlling the related partition, the service processor is working and checking
the system for errors, ensuring the connection to the HMC for manageability purposes.
With the system up and running, the service processor provides the possibility to view and
change the Power-On settings using the Advanced System Management Interface. Also,
the surveillance function of the service processor is monitoring the operating system to
check that it is still running and has not stalled.
Accessing ASMI
If the service processor is connected to an open network, you can access the Advanced
System Management Interface using a web browser connection to the IP address of the
service processor. You must log in with the general or admin ID and password.
You can also access the ASMI from the HMC. Select the server name, then from the Tasks
menu, select Operations, then Launch Advanced System Management (ASM).

2-56 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Advanced System Management interface (2 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-50. Advanced System Management interface (2 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
This is the welcome menu of the Advanced System Management interface. You must log in
with the general or admin ID and password.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-57
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

ASMI example
IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-51. ASMI example AN113.0

Notes:
The ASMI application is easy to navigate. The visual shows one example screen of the
network configuration for one of the Ethernet ports connected to the service processor.
If you were to expand all menus, you would see a list of options like this one. The exact list
that is available will depend on the managed system firmware version.

2-58 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM Power Systems

1. List the major components that make up an IBM Power Systems

server.

2. What is the main difference between the Express and Enterprise

Power models?

3. How many cores are available on POWER7 processor chips.

4. What is the TurboCore mode?

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-52. Checkpoint (1 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-59
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM Power Systems

5. List at least three functions of the flexible service processor.

6. What is the EnergyScale technology?

7. What is a location code?

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-53. Checkpoint (2 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:

2-60 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Exercise: System hardware components

IBM Power Systems

Unit
exerc
ise

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-54. Exercise: System hardware components AN113.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 2. Hardware system overview 2-61
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Unit summary
IBM Power Systems

Having completed this unit, you should be able to:

Identify basic architecture elements and hardware
components of IBM POWER7 processor-based systems
Discuss the different POWER7 server options: Express
versus Enterprise
Describe the functions of the service processor
Describe physical location code conventions
Use AIX commands to view location codes

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 2-55. Unit summary AN113.0

Notes:
More summary information:
IBM POWER7 processor-based systems have a wide range of configuration options:
- Processors, memory, I/O, partitions
There are both physical and AIX location codes.
The service processor provides system initialization and hardware error detection
functions, and the connection to the HMC.
The ASM Interface tool can be used to alter the service processor configuration.

2-62 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty Unit 3. Hardware Management Console

What this unit is about

This unit describes functions and configuration options for the
Hardware Management Console (HMC).

What you should be able to do

After completing this unit, you should be able to:
List the LPAR-related functions of the HMC
Describe how to connect the HMC to the managed system
Describe the new HMC version 7 web-based management console
and the web user interface (WUI) structure
Use the Guided Setup wizard to set configuration options
Add a managed system to the HMC application
Reboot the HMC
Configure the HMC network parameters
Create HMC users
Configure and assign task roles and managed resource roles
Configure HMC remote access options
Enable and disable remote virtual console support
Log in to the HMC command line and use HMC commands
Describe security options for HMC communication

How you will check your progress

Accountability:
Checkpoint questions
Machine exercises

References
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/systems/index.jsp
IBM System p and AIX Information Center

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-1
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Unit objectives
IBM Power Systems

After completing this unit, you should be able to:

List the LPAR-related functions of the HMC
Describe how to connect the HMC to the managed system
Describe the new HMC version 7 web-based management console and
the web user interface (WUI) structure
Use the Guided Setup wizard for HMC network configuration
Add a managed system to the HMC application
Reboot the HMC
Configure the HMC network parameters
Create HMC users
Configure and assign task roles and managed resource roles
Configure HMC remote access options
Enable and disable remote virtual console support
Log in to the HMC command line and use HMC commands
Describe security options for HMC communication

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-1. Unit objectives AN113.0

Notes:
You should be able to describe the HMCs functions and features and be able to configure
users and network options by the end of this unit.
The unit is separated into two topics. The first covers the HMC and its configuration. The
second covers creating HMC users, how to access the HMC remotely, and the security
issues associated with remote access.

3-2 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty 3.1. HMC overview

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-3
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Topic 1 objectives
IBM Power Systems

After completing this topic, you should be able to:

List the LPAR-related functions of the HMC
Describe how to connect the HMC to the managed system
Describe the new HMC V7 web-based management console
and web user interface (WUI) structure
Use the Guided Setup wizard for HMC network configuration
Add a managed system to the HMC application
Reboot the HMC
Configure the HMC network parameters

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-2. Topic 1 objectives AN113.0

Notes:
The first topic in this unit covers the features of the HMC version 7 with the web user
interface structure and how to configure a new HMC out of the box.

3-4 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Power Systems management consoles

IBM Power Systems

Power systems can be managed by the following Power

Systems management consoles (PSMCs):
Hardware Management Console (HMC)
Integrated Virtualization Manager (IVM)
Systems Director Management Console (SDMC)

Terminology:
The HMC and IVM manage LPARs and servers/managed systems
The SDMC manages virtual servers and hosts

A host can be managed by both an SDMC and an HMC at the

same time.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-3. Power Systems Management Consoles AN113.0

Notes:
The Power Systems server line offers three types of management consoles, depending on
your environment and requirements.
1. HMC: Hardware Management Console is used to manage one or more servers. All
management tasks can be done directly from the HMC, including partitioning the
system. All system events and state information is forwarded to the HMC.
2. IVM: Integrated Virtualization Manager offers a lower cost of entry into virtualization on
IBM POWER processor-based servers, since it does not require the use of a separate
hardware appliance like the Hardware Management Console (HMC) or Systems
Director Management Console (SDMC) for managing logical partitions (LPARs) on a
single system. IVM is packaged in the Virtual I/O Server (VIOS) software.
3. SDMC: The Systems Director Management Console is the successor to the HMC and
the IVM. SDMC supports POWER6 and POWER7 processor-based systems, including
Power Systems blades.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-5
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Hardware Management Console

IBM Power Systems

HMC is a PC-based console used in the

configuration and management of
partitions.
Runs custom Linux and Java application
Is remotely accessible:
Command line and browser-based graphical Rack-mount HMC
user interfaces
Can be set up for redundancy
It provides the following:
LPAR configuration and operation
management
Virtual console windows for partitions
Capacity on demand (CoD) management
Service tools Deskside HMC

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-4. Hardware Management Console AN113.0

Notes:
The Hardware Management Console is a dedicated system that provides a graphical and
command-line user interface for the configuration and management of logical partitions on
Power Systems servers. The HMC is a customized Intel-based PC, available in a desktop
or a rack-mount model, running Linux with a Java-based management application. You
cannot load any other applications onto the HMC.
The major functions of the HMC are for power on/off of the managed system, for LPAR
creation and operations, for access to the partitions consoles, for Capacity on Demand
resource management, and for serviceable events management and connection to the IBM
service organization.
A second HMC can be connected to a single managed system for redundancy. Multiple
managed systems can be managed by a single HMC.
The managed system continues to operate in the absence of an HMC by using partition
configuration information stored in NVRAM. Individual partitions can be rebooted using a
shut down command in the partitions operating system. The managed system can be

3-6 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty powered off and on, and will restart predefined partitions automatically if the HMC is not
available. However, performing configuration changes to the partitions requires the HMC.
If an HMC is used to manage a POWER7 server, the HMC must be a rack-mount HMC
model CR3 (or later), or deskside HMC model C05 (or later). Check the Power Systems
Infocenter for the latest information about the HMC hardware and software.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-7
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Latest available HMCs

IBM Power Systems

7042-CR6 rack-mounted HMC 7042-C08 deskside HMC:

2.53 GHz Intel Quad-core processor with 2.53 GHz Intel Quad-core processor with
12 MB L2 cache 8 MB L2 cache
4 GB (2 x 2 GB) of 1,333 MHz DDR3 4 GB (2 x 2 GB) of 1333 MHz DDR3
system memory system memory
500 GB SATA SFF HDD 250 GB SATA 3.5-inch HDD
SATA CD/RW - DVD-RAM SATA CD/RW - DVD-RAM
Four Ethernet ports Integrated dual-port Gigabit Ethernet
Four USB ports (two front, two rear) controller
One PCIe slot Optional dual-port Gigabit Ethernet
available
One PCI-X slot
Seven USB ports (two front, four rear,
one internal)
Two PCI-X slots
Three PCIe slots

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-5. Latest available HMCs AN113.0

Notes:
The visual shows the HMC system attributes associated with the different HMC machine
types and models.

3-8 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC connection to the server

IBM Power Systems

POWER processor-based
managed system

AIX Linux Unassigned

resources HMC
Partition 1 Partition 2
Hypervisor
Non-volatile RAM

Service
Processors
processor
Memory Ethernet
LPAR
I/O Slots Partition
allocation
configuration
tables
information is kept
both on HMCs and in
servers NVRAM.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-6. HMC connection to the server AN113.0

Notes:
This visual brings together several concepts:
Partitions are independent operating environments and their resources are managed by
the hypervisor. The hypervisor manages the resources for the partitions.
NVRAM is used on the managed system to hold a copy of the partition configuration so
that if the HMC or the network were to fail, the partitions can continue to run and even
reboot if necessary.
Partitions are configured and managed on the HMC which is a separate system. A copy
of the partition configuration data is also kept on the HMC (in addition to NVRAM).
The HMC is connected to the managed system through an Ethernet connection to the
service processor. The service processor is a separate, independent processor that
provides hardware initialization during system load, monitoring of environmental and
error events, and maintenance support.
Two HMCs can be connected to a managed system to provided HMC redundancy.
Either HMC can be used for operations and they remain synchronized.
An HMC (or pair of HMCs) can managed multiple managed systems.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-9
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

HMC: Managed system and LPAR

communications
IBM Power Systems

Service processor:
HMC SSL communication
Power control
Error event handling
Hypervisor code updates
Hypervisor (pass-through):
System configuration data
Partitioning control
Virtual I/O definition
Capacity on demand
Concurrent service
Console sessions
Operating systems:
External LAN connection
Gather hardware error events
Gather hardware inventory
Dynamic LPAR (AIX/Linux)

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-7. HMC: Managed System and LPAR communications AN113.0

Notes:
The HMC needs to communicate with the FSP, the POWER Hypervisor as well as the
operating system thats running within the LPAR.

3-10 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Configuring a new HMC

IBM Power Systems

Checklist to set a new HMC:

Power on the HMC.
Do not plug in the managed system yet!
Log in locally as hscroot.
Use Guided Setup wizard to configure HMC.
Configure the following: Date/time, hscroot and root passwords, add users,
configure networking, configure service provider, connection monitoring.
Reboot the HMC.
Check the HMC software version.
Upgrade HMC software if necessary.
Connect network cables to HMC and service processor.
HMC1 port on service processor connects to first Ethernet port on HMC.
Apply power to managed systems.
Set access passwords.
Apply any activation codes.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-8. Configuring a new HMC AN113.0

Notes:
Connect the HMC to the network and power it on. You will see the Linux initialization
messages and then will be prompted to log in. The default login account and password for
the HMC is hscroot and abc123. Because this is the same on all HMCs, you should change
the password immediately. New passwords must be at least seven characters.
If this is a new HMC, you will automatically be prompted to run the Guided Setup wizard
which will help you set up a few critical options. You can re-run this wizard at any time, or
access the individual configuration options separately.
One configuration check that the Guided Setup wizard does not do is check to be sure the
software version is up to date. How to check the version and upgrade the software will be
covered in a later unit in this course.
If you change the network configuration, you will need to restart the HMC.
Connect the managed system to the HMC
Connect the HMC1 port on the managed system to the first integrated Ethernet port on the
HMC. When the HMC networking is fully configured and the Ethernet cable between the

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-11
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

HMC and the managed system is connected, then you can plug in the managed system to
the power source.
For redundant HMCs, the second HMC connects to the HMC2 port on the managed
system. Never connect the same HMC to both ports.

3-12 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC V7 web UI: Overview

IBM Power Systems

Supports POWER5/6/7 processor-based server systems

Real http / https GUI no need for WebSM interface
Leverage modern, familiar UI paradigms and technologies
Unify HMC family of user interfaces: z,p,i, Storage, and IVM
Consistent user experience across HMC and IBM web UI family
Navigation:
Simplification some tasks rearranged
Improving task discovery and reduce task depth
Consistent task placement
Consistent task categorization
Display more information in main views
Simplify complex functional areas
Task list available multiple ways (task list, Tasks button, right-click)
New functions:
Status bar
View users logged on
Disconnect / reconnect
Custom groups
Ability to customize which columns are displayed
Table filtering and sorting
Supports and enables significant new features and functionality, such as Live
Partition Mobility
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-9. HMC V7 web UI: Overview AN113.0

Notes:
The visual shows a summary of the HMC V7 capabilities.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-13
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

HMC pre-login welcome screen

IBM Power Systems

Connect by pointing your web browser to:

https://<hostname or IP address of HMC>

Launch HMC web

application.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-10. HMC pre-login welcome screen AN113.0

Notes:
This HMC uses a web-based user interface. This interface uses a tree-style navigation
model providing hierarchical views of system resources and tasks using drill-down and
launch-in-context techniques to enable direct access to hardware resources and task
management capabilities. It provides views of system resources and provides tasks for
system administration.
The Welcome window contains the link to log in to the HMC application, the ability to view
the online help information, and the summarized status information for the HMC.
Click the Log on and launch link to get to the login screen. Notice that you can access
online help and see system status before logging in.

3-14 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC login sessions

IBM Power Systems

Default root login is hscroot with default password of abc123.

Concept of multiple login sessions per user:
Is an important reason for creating unique logins for different users.
When logging out, choose:
Disconnect and your session ends, but tasks continue running.
You can reconnect to this session later.
Log off and your session ends, ending all tasks.
Reconnect and choose to continue a session or start a new one.

This is the default account.

Other accounts can be
created.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-11. HMC login sessions AN113.0

Notes:
The default administrator login for the HMC is hscroot. You cannot log directly into the HMC
with the Linux root password. Additional accounts can be created and these can have the
same hscroot access to objects and tasks, or a particular account can have a specific
subset of objects and tasks that it can use.
When you log out of the HMC, you use either the Log off option or the Disconnect option. A
disconnect will leave any running tasks running and allow you to reconnect to that session
later. Log off will stop any running tasks and log you out completely.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-15
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Disconnect versus logoff

IBM Power Systems

Logoff
command

Choose Log off

or Disconnect.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-12. Disconnect versus logoff AN113.0

Notes:
Logging off
Click Logoff in the upper right corner of the HMC interface to log off or disconnect.

3-16 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Reconnecting to login session (1 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

Reconnect to the Number of tasks

selected session. still running.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-13. Reconnecting to login session (1 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
The reconnect function shows why it is a good idea now to create separate users for the
HMC if there will be multiple people logging into the HMC. If everyone logs in as hscroot,
then when you reconnect, you might reconnect to someone elses session.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-17
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Reconnecting to login session (2 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

Tasks continued
running.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-14. Reconnecting to login session (2 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
The visual shows that when you reconnect, any running tasks are still active.
This will allow the user to resume what they were doing the last time they logged on or start
a new session.

3-18 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC Welcome screen after login

IBM Power Systems

Task bar

Navigation

Status bar

Work area
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-15. HMC Welcome screen after login AN113.0

Notes:
When you successfully log in to the HMC GUI, you will see the Welcome screen. From
here you can view the clickable major applications in the navigation bar, and you will see a
summary of the current status of servers that this HMC manages in the status bar. The
work area will provide more information about the applications in the navigation bar, and
the banner and task bar area will be along the top of the window. The task bar will show
any running tasks.
In the example in the visual, there are no current running tasks and the status bar shows
that there is at least one attention LED on an object. The status bar icons are clickable to
drill-down to get more information.
The banner, across the top of the workplace window, identifies the product and logo. It is
optionally displayed and is set by using the Change User Interface Settings task.
The Navigation pane, in the left portion of the window, contains the primary navigation links
for managing your system resources and the Hardware Management Console. The items
are referred to as nodes.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-19
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

The Work pane, in the right portion of the window, displays information based on the
current selection from the Navigation pane. For example, when Welcome is selected in the
Navigation pane, the Welcome window content is displayed in the Work pane, as shown in
the figure.
The Status bar, in the bottom left portion of the window, provides visual indicators of current
overall system status. It also contains a status overview icon, which can be selected to
display more detailed status information in the Work pane.
You can resize the panes of the Hardware Management Console workplace by moving the
mouse pointer over the border that separates the Navigation pane from the Work pane until
the mouse pointer changes to a double-pointed arrow. When the pointer changes shape,
press and hold the left mouse button while dragging the mouse pointer to the left or right.
Release the button and your Navigation pane or Work pane is now larger or smaller in size.
You can also do this within the Work pane border that separates the resources table from
the Tasks pad.

3-20 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC V7 user interface: Overall structure

IBM Power Systems

Task bar Logoff

Work area

Navigation

Status bar
Task pad

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-16. HMC V7 user interface: Overall structure AN113.0

Notes:
Navigation area
The navigation area, as shown in the visual, contains the primary navigation links for
managing your system resources and the Hardware Management Console.
Access the different applications listed in the navigation bar by clicking their names. The
work area part of the window will change depending on the application. The Servers
application will show a list of all servers being managed by this HMC. If you click a specific
servers name, it will show a table of all of its LPARs. Well look at these two table views
more closely.
The rest of the applications will help you configure a server using system plans, configure
and monitor the HMC, manage any serviceable events that have been logged by any of the
partitions, and manage software updates to both the HMC itself and to the firmware of the
servers.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-21
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Task bar
The Task bar provides the capability of an active task switcher. The Task bar can be used
as a navigation aid to move between tasks that were launched and have not yet been
closed. The task switcher does not pause or resume existing tasks. Clicking a task in the
Task bar brings that task's window forward and gives it focus. The right end of the Task bar
also contains the following information as shown in the visual:
User ID that you are logged in as. By clicking the user ID, you launch the Change User
Interface Settings task.
Help displays information about all the tasks on the Hardware Management Console
and how to use the web-based user interface on the Hardware Management Console.
Logoff launches the Logoff or Disconnect task.
Tasks pad
The Tasks pad displays below the Work Area when you have selected Systems
Management or System Plans in the Navigation Area. This view contains available tasks
for selected managed objects. The content of the Tasks pad changes when different
objects are selected in the Work Area.
The Tasks pad is resizeable by moving the mouse pointer over the border that separates
the Work pane from the Tasks pad.
Status bar
The Status bar in the bottom left pane provides an at a glance view of overall system
status, including managed system resources and the Hardware Management Console. A
status-sensitive title, background color, and icons are part of the Status bar. The status
indicators (icons) appear in color when one or more objects go into unacceptable status,
have attention LEDs, or have open serviceable events; otherwise, the status icon is greyed
out.

3-22 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Flexibility: Launching tasks

IBM Power Systems

Tasks menu

Context menu
button

Tasks grouped
into standard
Task pad
categories.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-17. Flexibility: Launching tasks AN113.0

Notes:
Accessing tasks
You can access tasks from the task pad, the tasks menu, or the selected menu next to the
object. Also, if the task is running, you can click the task in the Task bar.
Running tasks
The Task bar not only shows running tasks, it also provides the capability to switch the
active task. The Task bar can be used as a navigation aid to move between tasks that were
launched and have not yet been closed. Switching tasks does not pause or resume existing
tasks. Clicking a task in the Task bar brings that tasks window forward and gives it focus.
Tasks menu
The Tasks menu displays on the table toolbar. The Tasks menu is only available for table
selections. For example, in the Select column of the Servers Work pane table, select the
object with which you want to work. (A check mark displays.) Click Tasks for the list of the
applicable task groups for the selected objects in the table. Select a task group; then select

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-23
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

a task to launch for the object. If more than one object is selected, the tasks that display in
the menu apply to all selections.
Not all tasks can be performed on more than one selected object as the same time. If you
attempt one of these tasks, a window opens requiring you to select the one system on
which to perform the task.
Context menus
The context menu lists the task groups appropriate for the selected object. Context menus
are available for table selections only. For example, in the Select column of the Servers
Work pane table, select the object with which you want to work. (A check mark displays.)
The context menu button (double right arrows) appears next to the object name you have
selected. Click the button and the Task Groups menu displays for that particular object.
Then select a task to launch for the object. If more than one object is selected, the tasks
that appear in the context menus apply to all selections.
Not all tasks can be performed on more than one selected object as the same time. If you
attempt one of these tasks, a window opens display requiring you to select the one system
on which to perform the task.
Task bar
The Task bar provides the capability of an active task switcher. The Task bar can be used
as a navigation aid to move between tasks that were launched and have not yet been
closed. The task switcher does not pause or resume existing tasks. Clicking a task in the
Task bar brings that task's window forward and gives it focus.

3-24 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Server table view

IBM Power Systems

Default server table view shows status, available (free) CPU and
memory resources, and any current reference codes.
Select a server to access tasks available for that server.

Click Servers to
see a list of
servers.
Then select the
check box to see
tasks available for
that server.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-18. Server table view AN113.0

Notes:
To list all servers being managed by the HMC, click the Servers link in the Navigation bar.
In the example in the visual, there are two servers: sys304 and sys306. To select a server,
select the check box in the Select column.
The default server table view shows available memory and processing resources and the
status. If there was a current reference code, then it would show as well. Example tasks to
run for a selected server are to view its properties or to power it off.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-25
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

LPAR table view

IBM Power Systems

Default LPAR table view includes name, status, configured CPU

and memory resources, operating systems, and reference code.
Select a partition to access tasks available for that partition.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-19. LPAR table view AN113.0

Notes:
In the example shown in the visual, the sys304 managed system has been selected under
Servers in the navigation bar. This will show all LPARs configured on the system, whether
they are running or not.
This view will show basic configuration information for the partitions plus their status. In the
example in the visual, no partitions are selected. The list of tasks when no partitions are
selected is different than when a partition or partitions are selected (by selecting the check
box in the Select column).

3-26 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

LPAR consoles
IBM Power Systems

The HMC provides the ability to access a partitions console.

Only one permitted for each LPAR at a time.
To access from the GUI, select a running partition and use the Console
Window > Open Terminal Window task.
If the window will not open because there is one already open, you can use
Close Terminal Connection first.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-20. LPAR consoles AN113.0

Notes:
From the LPAR table view, you can select partitions and run tasks specific to that partition.
One common task is to open a partitions console window.
Open a virtual (console) terminal window for a running partition
If there is not an open virtual terminal window for an active partition, you can select the
partition and run the Console Window > Open Terminal Window task.
Close a (console) terminal window
There are two ways to close a virtual terminal.
The preferred, usual method of closing a terminal window on a PC is to click the X in the
upper right corner of the terminal window. This removes the window from the desktop
and closes the connection.
You might need to force a virtual terminal window to close by selecting the partition
name in the Server Management area of the HMC, right-clicking, and choosing Close
Terminal Connection. Use this procedure when the virtual terminal window is open on
another HMC (or remotely from a browser) and you want to turn off that session or as a
recovery in case you cannot close the window for some reason.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-27
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

HMC online help and documentation

IBM Power Systems

HMC online help:

The Help link is always available in the upper right part of the task bar.

Help buttons on task windows give context sensitive help.

You can search for topics from the help screen.

Main HMC documentation:

Operations Guide for the HMC and Managed Systems (SA76-0085)
Available from the Resource Link site:
http://www.ibm.com/servers/resourcelink
Hardware Management Console V7 Handbook (SG24-7491)
An IBM Redbooks document available from www.redbooks.ibm.com

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-21. HMC online help and documentation AN113.0

Notes:
To get more information about how to use the HMC, you can access the online help facility
from the HMC itself, or access the Operations Guide available on the Internet.
There is also a link to the online HMC help screens from the pre-login screen.
In addition, when we discuss the HMC command-line interface later in this course, you will
see that HMC commands have man pages accessible from the command line.

3-28 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC V7 documentation
IBM Power Systems

Follow the links on the HMC welcome screen for support

information, tutorials, and documentation.

Online documentation

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-22. HMC V7 documentation AN113.0

Notes:
Online links are available from the HMC Welcome screen. An HMC tutorial and
documentation are available from Resource Link. Resource Link requires a unique login
account and password.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-29
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Work area: Tables

IBM Power Systems

Toolbar features: Select/Deselect all, filtering, sorting, column display

and ordering.
ordering
Note: Toolbar details are shown on the next chart.

Item selection Toolbar Column

sizing

Summary Click to sort Scrolling

Note: Shift-select to select a range.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-23. Work area: Tables AN113.0

Notes:
When you click a managed server in the Navigation area, the Work pane displays the list of
partitions defined on the server.
If you click the Column configuration icon on the table toolbar, optional attributes display.
This function enables you to select additional attributes that you want displayed as columns
in the table. It also allows you to reorder the columns.
Displaying server and partition details
To display details (properties) about a server or partition, you can select the server (or
partition) by clicking in the Select column in the Work pane table. Then you can either click
Properties from the Tasks pad or click the double-arrow icon next to the server (or
partition) name and click Properties from the context menu. In both cases, the Properties
window opens.

3-30 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Toolbar features
IBM Power Systems

Select all: Select all of the items which are shown in the current table
view.
Deselect all
Show filter row: Filter according to specified text.
Contains, does not contain, starts with, ends with, matches, is empty, is not
empty
Clear all filters
Edit sort: Up to three sort fields can be specified. Sort by
ascending/descending.
Name, ID, status, processing units, memory, active profile, type, reference
code, processor, service partition, configured, default profile
Clear all sorts
Configure columns: Select which columns to display.
Name, ID, Status, Processing Units, Memory, Active Profile, Type, Reference
Code, Processor, Service partition, Configured, Default Profile
Reset columns: Reset column order, visibility, and width.
Note: These settings (for each user ID) are preserved between
sessions.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-24. Toolbar features AN113.0

Notes:
The toolbar is extremely useful and flexible for adjusting the information on display.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-31
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Flexibility: Filtering columns

IBM Power Systems

Filters

Filter text

Filter
results
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-25. Flexibility: Filtering columns AN113.0

Notes:
The display area can be easily changed by using filters. This greatly improves flexibility.

3-32 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Flexibility: Sort options

IBM Power Systems

Sort
Sort
indicator

Sort on Sort
multiple fields
columns

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-26. Flexibility: Sort options AN113.0

Notes:
The work area data can be displayed in a particular sort order.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-33
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Flexibility: Custom groups

IBM Power Systems

Create groups of objects (for example, servers and LPARs):

Group by location, business function, or department.
Add LPARs from one or more servers.

Add LPARs from one or more servers.

Default groups (showing all partitions or all objects).
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-27. Flexibility: Custom groups AN113.0

Notes:
Groups are comprised of logical collections of objects. You can report status on a group
basis, allowing you to monitor your system in a way that you prefer.
You can also nest groups (a group contained within a group) to provide hierarchical or
topology views.
One or more user-defined groups might already be defined on your HMC. There are default
groups listed under the Custom Groups node under Server Management. The default
groups are All Partitions and All Objects. You can create others, delete the ones that were
created, add to created groups, or delete from created groups by using the Manage
Custom Groups task.

3-34 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Status Overview
IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-28. Status Overview AN113.0

Notes:
When you click the Status Overview icon, it displays a highly visible and detailed summary
of system status in the Work pane, as shown in the figure. It displays details about any
errors (objects with unacceptable state), attention LEDs active, or open serviceable events
found for the HMC or managed objects. It also summarizes the total number of errors,
attention LEDs, and open serviceable events by object type. Object types include the
server, partition, frames, and the HMC. When any of these conditions are present, links are
available to drill down and display all objects with the particular state in the Work pane.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-35
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

SRC lookup
IBM Power Systems

This is the ability to look up the eight-digit reference codes (SRCs).

The majority of codes are listed in the initial release.
Later, many four-digit codes are converted to eight digits.

CA00E1F6

Determine boot device sequence

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-29. SRC lookup AN113.0

Notes:
You can now look up SRC codes from the HMC as shown in the visual.

3-36 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC Management: Overview

IBM Power Systems

HMC network
configuration

HMC
operations

HMC
administration

HMC users
management
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-30. HMC Management: Overview AN113.0

Notes:
HMC Management contains a categorized or alphabetical view of Hardware Management
Console management tasks and their descriptions. These tasks are used for setting up the
Hardware Management Console, maintaining its internal code, and securing the Hardware
Management Console.
To display the tasks in the Work pane:
Select the HMC Management node in the Navigation pane.
From the Work pane, click the task you want to perform.
By default, a categorized listing of the tasks displays. The categories include:
- Operations
- Administration
If you want to see what level of the HMC you are currently working with, move your
mouse over HMC Version found at the top of the Work pane.
If you want an alphabetical listing of the tasks, click Alphabetical List in the upper right
corner of the Work pane. Click Categorized List to go back to the task categories.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-37
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Systems Management
IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-31. Systems Management AN113.0

Notes:
Systems Management is used to manage servers, partition, and work groups.

3-38 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

System Plans
IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-32. System Plans AN113.0

Notes:
In this area, you can create, import, and manage system plans.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-39
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Service Management
IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-33. Service Management AN113.0

Notes:
This area provides tools and applications used by the servicer.

3-40 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Updates
IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-34. Updates AN113.0

Notes:
The figure shows the HMC Updates node on the navigation area. When selecting this task,
it will display its content in the content area as a portal for HMC and managed system code
and Firmware updates.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-41
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

User settings
IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-35. User settings AN113.0

Notes:
When you click the user name in the upper right of the HMC main screen, the User
Interface Settings screen displays. The options can be selected or deselected to customize
the view for the user. These changes will take effect immediately and will be in effect for
both a local and remote user.
Selecting the option Save settings as my defaults at logoff preserves the panel options.
This will also save any additional changes to customize the view in other HMC options.

3-42 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC network configuration

IBM Power Systems

Needed for configuring HMC network options:

Private or open network for HMC to service processor
HMC host name
IP addresses
Domain name LAN to partitions
DNS server IP address Open and other hosts
DHCP setting network

Default gateway IP address

Additional routes
Firewall configuration

Private
HMC network
LAN to service
processor
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-36. HMC network configuration AN113.0

Notes:
In the next section of this unit, you will see several screens where you must supply
information about your HMC and its network. This visual lists the options that you must
decide whether to enable, and the information that you will need to enter. Plan ahead and
document all of this information before you attempt to configure the HMC. You will need
some knowledge of basic TCP/IP configuration information or help in this area.
Some of the acronyms used in the visual are explained here:
Domain Name System (DNS): The HMC needs to know which DNS server to use.
Internet Protocol (IP): The HMC needs an IP address configured for one or two Ethernet
interfaces.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP): The HMC can be configured as a DHCP
server for its managed systems.
Private versus open network for HMC to the service processor
One of the decisions you have is whether to connect the HMC to the service processor
over a private network or over an open network. A private network is one that is restricted

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-43
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

to HMC and service processor connections. An open network has other network hosts
connected to it. The visual shows a graphic with a private network connecting the HMC to
the service processor and an open network connecting the HMC to the partitions. This is a
typical configuration and the easiest to configure.
For more details refer to the Preinstallation configuration worksheet for the HMC session
on IBM Power Systems Hardware Information Center at
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/powersys/v3r1m5/index.jsp.

3-44 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC network options: Local HMC (1 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

Private (dedicated) network that connects

HMCs and FSPs:
DHCP client
HMC is a DHCP server.
Managed system FSPs are DHCP clients.

HMC-FSP connection: Direct attach

HMC: eth0 to HMC1 port on FSP.

DHCP client
Or indirect attach:
HMC: eth0 to hub/switch.
Hub/switch to HMC1 port on FSP.
DHCP client

Suggestion: Connect first HMC as local

HMC.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-37. HMC network options: Local HMC (1 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
A private network is a separate dedicated network that includes only managed systems
FSP, HMCs, or both. The private Ethernet port on the HMC is usually defined as a Dynamic
Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. This port automatically recognizes the
managed systems (defined as DHCP client) in a private network when the process is
carried out correctly. DHCP provides an automated method for the DHCP server to assign
IP address to DHCP clients in a network; in this case, the HMC is intended to provide
DHCP addresses to managed systems and any other attached HMCs that are configured
as DHCP clients.
Local HMC: A desktop or a rack-installed HMC is directly or through a switch connected to
the managed system through a private network. The HMC in your private network has,
usually, one of its Ethernet ports configured as the DHCP server for your private network.
The managed system by default has its Ethernet ports configured as DHCP clients.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-45
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Note

A second Ethernet port of HMC can be configured to connect to an open network as a

static IP address or a DHCP client. Any additional HMCs in your private network are
usually configured as DHCP clients.

Cabling Option-1: Connect one of the Ethernet ports on the HMC directly to one of the
service processor (HMC) ports on the managed system (diagram on the left).
Cabling Option-2: Connect one of the Ethernet ports on the HMC to a hub (private), which
also has the managed systems connected to it through the service processor (HMC) ports
(diagram on the right).

3-46 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC network options: Local HMC (2 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

Open network interface

HMC eth1 has static IP address or could be DHCP client.
DHCP client

Open
DHCP client network

Open
network

Static IP DHCP client

The HMC interface (eth0) is on a private network while

interface (eth1) is on an open network.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-38. HMC network options: Local HMC (2 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
Local HMC: A desktop or a rack-installed HMC is directly connected to the managed
system through a private network. The HMC in your private network has one of its Ethernet
ports configured as the DHCP server for your private network. The managed system by
defaults has its Ethernet ports configured as DHCP clients.

Note

A second Ethernet port of HMC can be configured to connect to an open network as a

DHCP client (or with a static address). Any additional HMCs in your private network are
usually configured as DHCP clients.

Cabling Option-1: Connect one of the Ethernet ports on the HMC directly to one of the
service processor (HMC) ports on the managed system (diagram on the left). The second
Ethernet port on the HMC, however, is intended to communicate to the intranet or Internet

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-47
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

and is thus configured as open using either a static IP address or as a DHCP client. As a
client it will pick up its IP address from the network DHCP server.
Cabling Option-2: Connect one of the Ethernet ports on the HMC to a hub (private), which
also has the managed systems connected to it through the service processor (HMC) ports
(diagram on the right). The second Ethernet port on the HMC, however, is intended to
communicate to the intranet or Internet and is thus configured as open using either a static
IP address or as a DHCP client. As a client, it will pick up its IP address from the network
DHCP server.

3-48 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

FSP network options

IBM Power Systems
Direct Ethernet cable from HMC eth0 to HMC1 or HMC2 port on the flexible service
processor (FSP).
Cable can be a standard Ethernet cable or crossover cable.
Configure DHCP services on the HMC or use assigned static IP addresses.
Using static IP addresses requires configuration setup on FSP using ASMI.
FSP default configuration is DHCP client; however, each port has a predefined
default IP address.
POWER 5 default FSP addresses:
FSP-A 192.168.2.147 for HMC1 port 192.168.3.147 for HMC2 port
FSP-B 192.168.2.146 for HMC1 port 192.168.3.146 for HMC2 port

POWER6 and POWER7 default FSP addresses HMC to FSP is SSL encrypted.
HMC to a single server with a single
Card type/position HMC1 default IP HMC2 default IP service processor can be as simple as
a straight Ethernet cable. No external
CEC FSP - position A 169.254.2.147 169.254.3.147 switch is required.
CEC FSP - position B 169.254.2.146 169.254.3.146
DHCP mandatory due to internal requirements to 590, 595, 795
CEC BPC - Position A 169.254.2.145 169.254.3.145
CEC BPC - Position B 169.254.2.144 169.254.3.144
IO BPC - Position A 169.254.2.148 169.254.3.148
IO BPC - Position A 169.254.2.149 169.254.3.149

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-39. FSP network options AN113.0

Notes:
The default TCP/IP addresses for the FSP Ethernet ports HMC1 and HMC2 differ
depending on the platform they are on. The following table documents the default IP
addresses of both ports for both single and redundant FSPs (if installed), based on the
platform they are installed on.
The FSP ports HMC1 and HMC2, in the absence of a DHCP server, will go to their default
IP addresses.
This is true whether they are attached to a network or not. If the network is not 169.254.2 or
169.254.3 -- and you would not expect it to be -- the port will nevertheless be set to that
value until you manually change it to one that can be used on the network.
Note that you should not connect HMC1 and HMC2 ports on the FSP to the same subnet.
If you only have one subnet, only configure one of the ports, HMC1 or HMC2.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-49
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Local single HMC with redundant FSP

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-40. Local single HMC with redundant FSP AN113.0

Notes:
This visual shows an example of the network connectivity from the HMC to the flexible
service processor (FSP). Dual FSP support is standard on two system unit (2 CEC) or
larger Power Systems.
The HMC must be attached to both FSPs using an external ethernet switch or a hub. The
HMC can provide DHCP services for IP address assignment or static IP.

3-50 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Local redundant HMCs network configuration

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-41. Local redundant HMCs network configuration AN113.0

Notes:
This is an example of two HMCs managing two servers each with redundant FSPs.
For installations with two HMCs, a second switch or hub must be provided to allow the
alternate FSP Interface card's ports to be connected to the second HMC. This connectivity
allows the HMC to manage the system through either of the redundant FSP Interface
cards.
In the example, HMC1 manages both servers by attaching the HMC1 port on both service
processors, and HMC2 also manages both servers by attaching the HMC2 port on both
service processors. Dual HMCs must use different subnets for server management.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-51
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Redundant remote HMC configuration

IBM Power Systems

server-A

server-B

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-42. Redundant remote HMC configuration AN113.0

Notes:
HMC1 will manage the server-A in Rochester attaching to HMC1-Port on each of the two
service processors. HMC2 will manage the server-B in Dallas attaching to HMC1-Port on
each of the two service processors.
By using static IP addressing, either HMC3 or HMC4 located in NYC can be used to
connect and manage server-A and server-B connecting to HMC2-port on each of the four
service processors.
Please note also that in a remote HMC configuration, a desktop or a rack-installed HMC
(for example, HMC3) is used to remotely access either a managed system directly (as
depicted in the visual) or indirectly through another HMC, which is directly connected to a
managed system. Remote HMCs are usually present in an open network.

3-52 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Set up HMC
IBM Power Systems

HMC

750 rack
mounted

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-43. Set up HMC AN113.0

Notes:
Remember that the HMC is a stand-alone intelligent appliance. Therefore, it can be set up
and configured at any time independent of the managed systems or the network.
Unpack the HMC and connect the mouse/keyboard/monitor as shown in the visual. At this
stage:
Do not connect the Ethernet port on the HMC to the Ethernet ports (HMC) of the service
processor of the managed system.
Do not connect power to the managed system. However, it is no longer a big issue if the
flexible service processor (FSP) has already been powered on. You would simply
unplug the MS (power cord reset) and after the HMC is ready to communicate with the
MS, plug it back in. Because the MS is still a DHCP client it will see the HMC and pick
up its new address, from the HMC.
The keyboard and mouse might be shipped as separate units with two separate cables or
they might be a combined unit with a USB connector. Attach the cables to the appropriate
ports at the back of the HMC. The HMC might have one or two Ethernet ports depending

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-53
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

on the configuration ordered. It is advisable to have two Ethernet ports to provide you with
the flexibility of integrating the HMC in to your network.
After the HMC has been set up, now connect an Ethernet cable from one of the ports on
the HMC to a port on the service processor on the managed system. This is a private
connection. Now connect power to the managed system.

3-54 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Configure HMC: Overview

IBM Power Systems

Procedure to set up a new HMC:

1. Power off managed system.
2. Power on HMC
3. Log in as hscroot (default password is abc123).
4. Use the Guided Setup Wizard (HMC) to do the following:
a. Set date and time.
b. Change passwords for standard users.
hscroot = abc123
c. Create additional users if necessary.
d. Configure HMC network connections.
e. Configure HMC to connect to service provider.
5. Reboot the HMC.
C
6. Check the HMC software version. HM

a. Upgrade if necessary.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-44. Configure HMC: Overview AN113.0

Notes:
Hardware connections
Unpack and set up the HMC. If you plan to use an external modem with the HMC to dial up
IBM service to transmit service errors, connect the modem and a phone line to the modem.
We will discuss details of the configuration steps in the following charts.
One configuration check that the Guided Setup Wizard does not do is ensure that the
software version is up to date. How to check the version and upgrade the software will be
covered in a later unit in this course.
If this is a new HMC, you will automatically be prompted to run the Guided Setup Wizard
when you power on the HMC. This will help you set up all of the critical options. You can
re-run this Wizard at any time, or access the individual configuration options separately.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-55
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Logon panel
IBM Power Systems

User ID: hscroot

User password: abc123

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-45. Logon panel AN113.0

Notes:
The visual depicts the HMC console Logon banner. Use the following login ID=hscroot with
an initial default password of abc123.

3-56 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Setup wizard
IBM Power Systems

Guided Setup Wizard can be run at any time.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-46. Setup wizard AN113.0

Notes:
This wizard helps you set up your new system and the HMC. To set up your system and
HMC successfully, complete all the tasks in the order that the wizard presents them. After
you complete this wizard, you can use the properties for an object to make changes.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-57
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Guided Setup Wizard

IBM Power Systems

The Guided Setup Wizard opens when you power on a new

HMC for the first time.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-47. Guided Setup Wizard AN113.0

Notes:

3-58 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Display prerequisites
IBM Power Systems

Prerequisite is a nice overview of

what you will need to complete the
wizard.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-48. Display prerequisites AN113.0

Notes:
Here we see the first screen of the setup wizard. It tells you which steps you are getting
ready to take. It also includes a Prerequisite button that gives you an overview of what
information you will need to complete the setup.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-59
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Set date and time

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-49. Set date and time AN113.0

Notes:
This panel enables you to set the date, time, and time zone where the HMC is located. The
HMC might be in a different time zone from, the managed systems if using an open
network connection. The city is important because it might or might not adhere to daylight
savings time.

3-60 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Change passwords: hscroot

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-50. Change passwords: hscroot AN113.0

Notes:
On a new HMC, you should change the default passwords for hscroot and root
immediately. The default passwords for these two profiles are abc123 and passw0rd,
respectively. The new passwords must be at least seven characters long. Be sure to write
down the passwords and store in a safe place for later reference.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-61
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Change passwords: root

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-51. Change passwords: root AN113.0

Notes:
On a new HMC, you should change the default passwords for hscroot and root
immediately. The default passwords for these two profiles are abc123 and passw0rd,
respectively. The new passwords must be at least seven characters long. Be sure to write
down the passwords and store in a safe place for later reference.

3-62 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Add HMC users

IBM Power Systems

You are limited to

existing roles.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-52. Add HMC users AN113.0

Notes:
You can optionally create new HMC users. Here you can type the user name and a
password (this page does not provide the capability to enter a short description). Choose to
add a profile with the hmcsuperadmin role as a second profile (or back door) in case the
hscroot password is forgotten. You can add other profiles later.
You must also select one of the task roles in the bottom part of the window. Every user
must be assigned a task role which defines the types of HMC tasks that the user can
perform. Later we will discuss how to tailor your own task roles.
Standard task role descriptions
Following are general descriptions of the default task roles. New roles can be created if the
default roles do not meet your requirements.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-63
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Service representative (hmcservicerep)

A service representative is an IBM service representative who is at your location to install
or repair the machine. It is strongly recommended that you create a user named hscpe with
the service representative authority for software fixes and updates from your software
support personnel. Support might need to log on to your HMC using this username when
analyzing a problem.
Viewer (hmcviewer)
A viewer can view HMC information, but cannot change any configuration information.
Operator (hmcoperator)
An operator is a user who is responsible for daily system operation. Tasks that an operator
cannot do include adding new users and changing the definitions of task roles.
Product engineer (hmcpe)
A product engineer is someone who assists in support operations. The differences
between the service representative task role and the product engineer task role are slight
and can be viewed in the Managing Your Server document. For example, the product
engineer can shut down the HMC and close virtual terminal windows, whereas the service
representative cannot.
Super administrator (hmcsuperadmin)
The super administrator acts as the root user, or manager of the HMC system. The system
administrator has unrestricted authority to access and modify most of the HMC system.

3-64 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Completion checkpoint message

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-53. Completion checkpoint message AN113.0

Notes:
This is a checkpoint message indicating the configuration steps completed so far and the
remaining steps.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-65
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Network settings: HMC identification

IBM Power Systems

Network

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-54. Network settings: HMC identification AN113.0

Notes:
This visual shows the first screen you will see of the network settings. You will also see this
panel if you choose Customize Network Settings from the HMC Configuration
application. Notice there are four tabs along the top.
The network options configured through these screens will require a restart of the HMC for
the changes to be effective.
Identification tab
Console name: Specify a name unique to the network domain to be the HMCs
hostname.
Domain name: The Domain Naming System (DNS) domain name for this HMC; for
example, companyname.com or company.abc.com.
Console description: Enter a description for this HMC. For example, the HMC can be
described by the systems they manage or by their location.

3-66 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Network settings: LAN Adapters (1 of 4)

IBM Power Systems

Network

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-55. Network settings: LAN Adapters (1 of 4) AN113.0

Notes:
LAN Adapters tab
The HMC might have two (or more) Ethernet ports eth0 and eth1 depending on the
configuration ordered. The MAC addresses of the two network interface cards (NICs) are
shown in the LAN Adapter pane. Each Ethernet port can be configured independent of the
other, and either of these Ethernet adapters can be configured to connect to the service
processor of the managed system. Select one of the network interfaces and click Details.
The screen that displays is shown on the next visual.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-67
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Network settings: LAN Adapters (2 of 4)

IBM Power Systems

Network

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-56. Network settings: LAN Adapters (2 of 4) AN113.0

Notes:
The LAN Adapter Details screen has two tabs.
LAN Adapter Detail and Firewall Settings
Here are details about the LAN Adapter tab:
Network type
It is recommended that you first configure a private network (instead of an open network)
for the HMC by clicking Private. A private network means that the HMC connects to the
managed systems directly or over a separate network which is not shared by other network
traffic. An open network refers to any general, public network that contains devices other
than HMCs and managed systems.
It is recommended that you implement communications (between the HMC and the
Managed system) through a private network, because of the additional security and ease
of setup that it provides. However, in some environments, this might not be feasible or
acceptable for various reasons, including the location of the Computer Systems control
center. The functionality of the HMC is the same on both types of networks.

3-68 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty Partition communication check box

The Partition communication check box, if selected, configures this interface for
communications between an HMC and logical partitions. Select this box for an interface
that connects to partitions. This check box should remain cleared for the initial HMC port
configuration required to connect to the service processor of the managed system,
because no partitions have been created.
Media speed
The default of automatic detection for the Ethernet adapter media speed is recommended
for the initial setup.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server
If you click the Private network button, you should configure this HMC as a DHCP server.
The client in this case will be the service processor on the managed system that this HMC
is managing. The DHCP clients are automatically assigned their own IP address and
configuration parameters from the DHCP server. In a private network, configure your first or
only HMC as a DHCP server. If you click the Open network button, the Enable DHCP
server option is grayed out and not available for selection.
Address range
A DHCP server has a range of IP addresses that it assigns to client systems. If you
configure the HMC as a DHCP server, select one of the following standard nonroutable IP
address ranges for your private network. Consult your network administrator before you
select a range. An example of these ranges is shown in the visual.
If you decide to connect your private network to an open network later, using standard
nonroutable IP addresses will allow your DHCP servers to co-exist. The DHCP server in
the HMC uses automatic allocation, which means that each unique service processor
Ethernet interface will be reassigned exactly the same IP address each time it is started.
Each Ethernet interface has a unique identifier based upon a built-in media access control
(MAC) address, which allows the DHCP server to reassign the same IP parameters.
DHCP client/IP address
This HMC port has been selected to be private. Because Private was selected, DHCP can
also be selected. DHCP automatically assigns an address compatible with the range of
addresses selected through the DHCP client/IP address list.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-69
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Network settings: LAN Adapters (3 of 4)

IBM Power Systems

Select the interface Network

and click Details.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-57. Network settings: LAN Adapters (3 of 4) AN113.0

Notes:
This chart represents the configuration of the second Ethernet port of the HMC for
connection over an open network, where the first Ethernet port of the HMC was configured
to connect the HMC to the managed system over a private network.

3-70 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Network settings: LAN Adapters (4 of 4)

IBM Power Systems

The network DHCP server

supplies the IP address.

Network
Or you can specify the IP address.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-58. Network settings: LAN Adapters (4 of 4) AN113.0

Notes:
The LAN Adapter Details screen has two tabs: LAN Adapter Detail and Firewall Settings.
Network type
Configure the second Ethernet port in an open network, by clicking Open. An open network
refers to any general, public network that contains devices other than HMCs and managed
systems.
Media speed
The default of automatic detection for the Ethernet adapter media speed is recommended
for the initial setup.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server
When you click the Open network button, the Enable DHCP server option is grayed out
and not available for selection.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-71
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

DHCP client/IP address

In the last part of the LAN Adapter tab, you can choose whether this HMC will be a DHCP
client through the LAN adapter. The TCP/IP address for the DHCP client can be obtained
from the DHCP Server on the open network, or you can supply this information. Refer to
the chart filled out earlier for this information.

3-72 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Network settings: LAN firewall

IBM Power Systems

Network

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-59. Network settings: LAN firewall AN113.0

Notes:
LAN Adapter Details (Firewall tab)
A firewall configuration would not be required when the Private network option is selected,
because the private network has only the HMC and its associated managed systems. In an
open network, a firewall usually controls outside access to your company network. The
firewall support on each of the HMC Ethernet adapters allows you to control access to the
HMC, based on IP addresses and user applications. Consider configuring the firewall on
HMC ports connecting to an open network.
If you want to control the HMC remotely or give remote access to others when the HMC is
on a open network, modify the firewall settings of the HMC Ethernet adapter that is
connected to your open network. (Check if you need to access the HMC through WebSM
or Secure Shell.) To allow access, first select the IP addresses you want to allow through
your firewall. You can allow any IP address using a particular application, or specific IP
addresses, through the firewall. For maximum security, remove all applications.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-73
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Allow specific applications from any IP address

To allow any IP address using a particular application through the firewall:
1. In the top box, highlight the application.
2. Click Allow Incoming. The application displays in the bottom box to signify that it has
been configured.
Allow specific applications from a specific IP address
To allow applications from specific IP addresses through the firewall:
1. In the top box, highlight an application.
2. Click Allow Incoming by IP Address.
3. On the Hosts Allowed panel, enter the clients IP address and network mask.
4. Click Add and OK.
Get help from your network administrator to ensure that your configuration conforms to
your network security requirements.

3-74 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Network settings: Name Services

IBM Power Systems

Network

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-60. Network settings: Name Services AN113.0

Notes:
Name Services configuration
This tab configures the Domain Name Services (DNS) settings for the HMC. Name
services provide IP to host name (and vice versa) mappings. Again, refer to the earlier
chart for information gathered from your network administrator to enter.
DNS enabled check box
If the network where the HMC resides uses DNS services, select the DNS enabled check
box. This configures the HMC as a DNS client.
DNS Server Search Order
Enter the DNS server search order. You can list DNS servers in the order that they will be
checked. As specified by the DNS protocol, the successive servers are only used if the
preceding servers are not available.
Domain Suffix Search Order
In the lower pane of the screen, enter the domain suffix search order for your network.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-75
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Network settings: Routing

IBM Power Systems

Network

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-61. Network settings: Routing AN113.0

Notes:
Network routing
You might have a network structure where additional network routes need to be configured.
This is typical of a complex communications network. An HMC might need to be able to
reach its partitions and those partitions might be on a remote network. A default gateway
might be all that you need to configure as the default gateway might be able to route all IP
packets to the correct network. Or, you might know of a more direct route to get to partitions
than the default gateway. You can add this route on this tab. Another reason is that you
might not have a complex network at all and are not using dynamic routing, in which case,
a few static routes might be all that you need.
Adding a route
To add a route, click New in the middle of the screen. The pop-up window that opens is
shown in the visual. Enter the destination network address, the gateway network address,
the subnet mask in use, and choose which adapter to use. Click OK to enter the route.

3-76 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty Enable routed

You might want to run the dynamic routed daemon. This daemon communicates with other
routed daemons to learn new, closer routes to remote networks.
Default gateway information
For many installations, the HMC simply needs to know the IP address of a gateway
system. The HMC then relies on this gateway for all routing services. Make sure that the
gateway device you choose is on the same subnet as the gateway system.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-77
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

HMC TCP/IP relationship to FSP (1 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

HMC FSP

eth0
HMC1
UNCONFIGURED
Power has
not been
applied.
eth1
HMC2
UNCONFIGURED

Intra/Internet

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-62. HMC TCP/IP relationship to FSP (1 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
HMC
Here we can see what we are trying to accomplish by configuring the Ethernet ports on the
HMC. When the HMC is delivered none of its Ethernet ports are configured, as such it
cannot talk to a MS. At least one of its ports must be configured in order for the two
systems to be able to communicate. You could configure one of its ports as private and to
be a DHCP server it is only intended to supply IP addresses to Managed systems and
possibly other HMCs. As a DHCP server you select a range of addresses (nonroutable)
that it will supply to its clients. The HMC will then provide an address for its own port that is
compatible with all the addresses within the selected range.
You can then configure the other HMC port to be open, in which case it can either be a
DHCP client (getting its IP address from the network DHCP server) or hard code its IP
address. Its purpose is to be able to provide remote access to the HMC.

3-78 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty Managed system

Both Ethernet ports on the managed system (labeled HMC1 and HMC2) are by default
DHCP clients. When the managed system is plugged in, it does a two-stage boot. In the
first stage, it is expecting to find a DHCP server (hopefully an HMC) and if it does, it will
acquire its IP address and (if the server is an HMC) auto configure itself to the HMC. If it
does not find a DHCP server it will come up under a default IP address. It can
communicate with an HMC using this address (if the HMC port address is compatible with
this default IP address). However, it is still configured as a DHCP client and if it finds a
DHCP server on its next boot, it would acquire a new IP address and no longer be able to
communicate with the HMC.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-79
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

HMC TCP/IP relationship to FSP (2 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

HMC FSP

eth0
HMC1
PRIVATE
DHCP SERVER Power has
Range:10.128.240.2
- 10.128.255.254 not been
255.255.255.0 applied.
eth0 -> 10.128.240.1
HMC2
OPEN eth1

FIXED IP ADDRESS
eth1 -> 9.5.31.19
OR DHCP CLIENT

Intra/Internet

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-63. HMC TCP/IP relationship to FSP (2 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
HMC
Here we can see what we are trying to accomplish by configuring the Ethernet ports on the
HMC. When the HMC is delivered none of its Ethernet ports are configured, as such it
cannot talk to a MS. At least one of its ports must be configured in order for the two
systems to be able to communicate. You could configure one of its ports as private and to
be a DHCP server it is only intended to supply IP addresses to Managed systems and
possibly other HMCs. As a DHCP server you select a range of addresses (nonroutable)
that it will supply to its clients. The HMC will then provide an address for its own port that is
compatible with all the addresses within the selected range.
You can then configure the other HMC port to be open, in which case it can either be a
DHCP client (getting its IP address from the network DHCP server) or hard code its IP
address. Its purpose is to be able to provide remote access to the HMC.

3-80 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty Managed system

Both Ethernet ports on the managed system (labeled HMC1 and HMC2) are, by default,
DHCP clients. When the managed system is plugged in, it does a two-stage boot. In the
first stage, it is expecting to find a DHCP server (hopefully an HMC) and if it does, it will
acquire its IP address and (if the server is an HMC) auto configure itself to the HMC. If it
does not find a DHCP server is will come up under a default IP address. It can
communicate with an HMC using this address (if the HMC port address is compatible with
this default IP address). However, it is still configured as a DHCP client and if it finds a
DHCP server on its next boot, it would acquire a new IP address and no longer be able to
communicate with the HMC.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-81
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Completion checkpoint message

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-64. Completion checkpoint message AN113.0

Notes:
This is a second checkpoint message that indicates that you have completed the Network
Setting and shows the additional remaining setup steps. The information in the next few
screens are not critical for making a successful connection to the managed system;
however, they are important for the effective management and service support of your
HMC.

3-82 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Contact information
IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-65. Contact information AN113.0

Notes:
These panels provide the contact information, such as: Contact Person, HMC
Administrator, and physical location of the HMC.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-83
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Email notification
IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-66. Email notification AN113.0

Notes:
You can add the email address that will be notified when problems occur on you system.

3-84 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Configuration completion
IBM Power Systems

Click Finish.
Reboot the HMC!

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-67. Configuration completion AN113.0

Notes:
Reboot HMC
After the HMC configuration is complete, you will need to reboot the HMC. Click Console >
Exit, and you will see options to log out, shut down, or reboot the HMC. Select the reboot
option on the list. This will cause the HMC to power down and restart. The HMC logon
panel will be displayed. When you log on, the HMC Application GUI will be displayed.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-85
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Reboot
IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-68. Reboot AN113.0

Notes:
To reboot the HMC, select HMC Management and then click Shut Down or Restart from
the list.

3-86 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

After reboot
IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-69. After reboot AN113.0

Notes:
When the HMC completes the boot process, the pre-logon screen will display. Now you can
log on with the new user ID and passwords created with the wizard.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-87
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

First connection to a managed system

IBM Power Systems

Click Pending.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-70. First connection to a managed system AN113.0

Notes:
Click Pending Authentication to set up the HMC access password that the HMC will use
to talk to the FSP. (this is not the hscroot password).
Also, you can set up the passwords for both the admin and general ASMI user passwords.
Do not forget these passwords!

3-88 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC TCP/IP relationship to FSP (1 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

HMC FSP

Power System auto configured

eth0
HMC1
without DHCP server
PRIVATE 192.168.2.147 (Power5)
eth0 -> 10.128.240.1 169.254.2.147 (Power6/7)
DHCP SERVER 255.255.255.0
10.128.240.2
10.128.255.254
255.255.255.0 eth1 without DHCP server
HMC2
192.168.3.147 (Power5)
OPEN 169.254.3.147 (Power6/7)
Eth1-> 9.5.31.19 255.255.255.0
FIXED IP ADDRESS
OR DHCP CLIENT

Intra/Internet No power

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-71. HMC TCP/IP relationship to FSP (1 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
This is how the ports should look before configuration has been done and power applied to
the managed system.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-89
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

HMC TCP/IP relationship to FSP (2 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

HMC FSP

Power System auto configured

eth0
HMC1
DHCP CLIENT
PRIVATE 10.128.255.254
eth0 -> 10.128.240.1 255.255.255.0
DHCP SERVER
10.128.240.2
10.128.255.254
255.255.255.0 eth 1
HMC2
OPEN DHCP CLIENT
Eth1-> 9.5.31.19 192.168.3.147 (Power5)
FIXED IP ADDRESS 169.254.3.147 (Power6/7)
OR DHCP CLIENT 255.255.255.0

Intra/Internet Apply power

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-72. HMC TCP/IP relationship to FSP (2 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
This is how it should look after the HMC has been configured, rebooted, and cabled to the
managed system and then power applied to the managed system.

3-90 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Success
IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-73. Success AN113.0

Notes:
After setting the service processor profiles, it should show a state of Powered Off.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-91
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Local versus remote HMC

IBM Power Systems

Actual/local HMC Remote HMC

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-74. Local versus remote HMC AN113.0

Notes:
You can see the difference in HMC web UI between local HMC access as opposed to a
remote web access.
Locking the HMC screen: To lock the HMC screen, open the Lock HMC Screen task
from the HMC Management work pane. The HMC screen is locked immediately. To
unlock the screen and return to the HMC workplace, press Enter and specify the
password for the user ID for which you are logged in.
Open Restricted Shell Terminal: Use this task to acquire a command line session. To
open a restricted shell terminal, open the Open Restricted Shell Terminal task from the
HMC Management work pane. The Restricted Shell window displays. From the
Restricted Shell window, you can issue commands remotely through secure shell
access to the managed system. This provides consistent results and automates
administration of managed systems.
Launch Remote HMC: You can use this task to start a session to another HMC.

3-92 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

View HMC Events

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-75. View HMC Events AN113.0

Notes:
This task shows the console event logs on the HMC. The HMC keeps a log of significant
operations and activities automatically, referred to as console events that occur while the
application is running. Thus, system events are individual activities that indicate when
processes occur, begin and end, and succeed or fail.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-93
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Shut Down or Restart

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-76. Shut Down or Restart AN113.0

Notes:
This task enables you to shut down (turn off the console) or to restart the console.

3-94 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Schedule Operations
IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-77. Schedule Operations AN113.0

Notes:
This task creates a defined schedule for certain tasks, such as activating a system or
partition using a specific profile, backing up Profile Data, or turning on or off a managed
system without operator assistance.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-95
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Change Network Settings

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-78. Change Network Settings AN113.0

Notes:
This task allows you to configure, update, and change the Ethernet settings for the
adapters cards installed in the HMC.

3-96 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Test Network Connectivity

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-79. Test Network Connectivity AN113.0

Notes:
You can see information concerning the networking configuration on the HMC. There are
tabs on this window (Ping, Interfaces, Address, Routes, Address Resolution Protocol
(ARP), Sockets, Transmission Control Protocol (TCP), User Datagram Protocol
(UDP), and Internet Protocol (IP)) to scroll through for information. This task also allows
you to send a ping to a remote host.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-97
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Change User Interface Settings

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-80. Change User Interface Settings AN113.0

Notes:
There are two options here, one for the default for all user interface settings and one for the
currently signed on user. The options that you can select or clear are the same.
The HMC user interface is made up of several major components: the banner, the
navigation pane, the work pane, the task bar, the status bar, and the tasks pad.
This task enables you to customize settings that control how the HMC interface displays,
including specific areas, such as the user interface components and nodes that display in
the navigation pane as shown in the visual.

3-98 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Change Date and Time

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-81. Change Date and Time AN113.0

Notes:
This task enables you to change the time and date of the battery operated HMC clock and
to add or remove time servers for the Network Time Protocol (NTP) service as shown in the
visual. The battery operated clock keeps the time and date for the HMC.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-99
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Launch Guided Setup Wizard

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-82. Launch Guided Setup Wizard AN113.0

Notes:
This is another way to start the wizard. It can be run at anytime. If you do not want to
change a setting, click Next; the wizard will keep the old setting.

3-100 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Welcome text
IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-83. Welcome text AN113.0

Notes:
The visual above shows the HMC Welcome Text input panel. Use the interface to display a
message to your users when they try to login to the HMC, Messages of the day for example
or HMC availability and maintenance schedules.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-101
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Add Managed Systems (1 of 3)

IBM Power Systems

Add the managed system to the Server Management application.

The managed system must be on the same network as HMC.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-84. Add Managed System (1 of 3) AN113.0

Notes:
If the HMC is on a private network with the service processor, then the HMC should find the
service processor automatically, and add it to the Server Management application.
If the HMC and service processor are on a network with other systems, or if the service
processor is using static IP addresses, then you must use the Add Managed System task
from the HMC Management Work pane to add the managed system to the list of Servers of
the Systems Management pane.
If this is a new managed system, and there is no DHCP server available, the default service
processor IP address will be 192.168.2.147 or 169.254.2.147 depending on your system
type for the first Ethernet port on the service processor card and 192.168.3.147 or
169.254.3.147 for the second Ethernet port.

3-102 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Add Managed Systems (2 of 3)

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-85. Add Managed System (2 of 3) AN113.0

Notes:
If you know the IP address of the managed system and the HMC access password, then
you can use the first option on this screen, Add a managed system and type the IP
address in the IP Address/Host name field. The password you enter is the HMC access
password, which must have already been set during a previous HMC to service processor
setup.
If you do not know the IP address, or the HMC access password has not been set up, then
type the range of IP addresses that it could be as shown in the example in the visual. The
range of addresses cannot exceed 256 total addresses. The next visual shows what
happens when this operation finds the managed system.
If you need to set or see the IP address of the service processor, you can connect a
terminal to the serial port of the service processor to access ASMI. This interface can be
used to configure the IP address that will be used by the service processor. You can then
connect the service processor to the network, and enter the IP address in the Find
managed systems option. This procedure is particularly useful if the service processor is
connected to an open network.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-103
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Add Managed Systems (3 of 3)

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-86. Add Managed System (3 of 3) AN113.0

Notes:
The visual shows the result of the find operation specified on the last visual. Select the
managed system and click Next to add this managed system to the HMC Systems
Management pane.

3-104 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Managing the server or HMC connection

IBM Power Systems

Menu options to:

Reset or remove connection
Disconnect another HMC
Add a managed system
Check service processor status

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-87. Managing the server or HMC connection AN113.0

Notes:
The visual points out some other important tasks that you might need to do to manage the
communications between the HMC and its managed systems.
Reset or remove a connection
We have already seen that Add Managed System task on the HMC Management Work
pane is how you can seek managed systems on the network and add them to the HMC
Systems Management. The visual shows an example where a second management
system was added to the System Management.
The opposite to Add Managed System is Reset or Remove Connection. This will allow you
to reset or remove a managed system from the Systems Management. If you choose this
menu option, another window will open asking if you want to reset or remove the managed
system. If you choose remove it, the managed system disappears from the Systems
Management. Choosing to reset the managed system will disconnect then reconnect the
managed system.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-105
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

If you suspect a problem with the managed system connection to the HMC, you can
perform a reset. If there is no connection between the managed system and the HMC, try a
reset to see if it fixes the issue. If a reset does not help, investigate the physical connection
between the HMC and the managed system and the network configurations.
Update managed system password
You can use the Change Password task to change the managed system's HMC access
password. This is the one used for communications between the HMC and the managed
systems service processors. If you change this password, you must change the password
for any other HMCs that connect to this managed system.

3-106 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Check managed system status

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-88. Check managed system status AN113.0

Notes:
Connection status
The Status menu option displays information about the status of the HMC connection to the
bulk power assemblies on the frame or to the service processors on the managed system.
You must select the managed system name first before accessing this option.
If you are viewing the connection status for a frame, you can see the state of the
connection from the HMC to side A and side B of the bulk power assembly. The HMC will
operate normally with a connection to either side A or side B. However, for code update
operations and some concurrent maintenance operations, the HMC needs connections to
both sides.
If you are viewing the connection status for a managed system, you can see the state of
the connection from the HMC to the primary and secondary service processors. The HMC
will operate normally with a connection to only the primary service processor. However, for
code update operations and some concurrent maintenance operations on the managed
system, the HMC needs connections to both the primary and secondary service

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-107
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

processors. If no secondary service processor is installed, only one connection to the

primary service processor is required.

3-108 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Check HMC software version

IBM Power Systems

Check in HMC management

HMC version

Or, check from HMC command line:

lshmc -V
"version= Version: 7
Release: 7.3.0
Service Pack: 1
HMC Build level 20110920.1
MH01281: Fix for HMC V7R7.3.0 SP1 (09-21-2011)
","base_version=V7R7.1.0
"
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-89. Check HMC software version AN113.0

Notes:
Another step in the configuration and maintenance of your HMC is to ensure that its
software is kept up to date. Check the HMC technical support website to make sure there
are no additional fixes for the HMC.
The visual shows two places where the HMC software version can be checked. Notice that
when you use the lshmc -V command from the command line, the fix packs that have
been loaded are displayed. The procedure for loading fixes will be covered later in this
course.
Check against website for latest version and fixes:
http://www14.software.ibm.com/webapp/set2/sas/f/hmc/home.html

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-109
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Topic 1: Checkpoint
IBM Power Systems

1. Which of the following are functions of the HMC?

a. Monitor TCP/IP network objects
b. Capacity on demand activation
c. Partition configuration
d. Activate partitions

2. When might an HMC need to be configured as a DHCP

server?

3. How is the HMC connected to its managed system?

4. True or False: One HMC can manage multiple managed

systems.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-90. Topic 1: Checkpoint AN113.0

Notes:

3-110 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty 3.2. HMC users, remote access, and security

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-111
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Topic 2: HMC users, remote access, and security

IBM Power Systems

After completing this topic, you should be able to:

Create HMC users
Configure and assign task roles and managed resource roles
Configure HMC remote access options
Enable and disable remote virtual console support
Log in to the HMC command line and use HMC commands
Describe security options, such as:
Controlling remote connection, virtual consoles, and SSH access
Managing certificates from the HMC
Overview of Integrated Virtualization Manager (IVM): The
HMC alternative

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-91. Topic 2: HMC users, remote access, and security AN113.0

Notes:

3-112 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC user management

IBM Power Systems

HMC users and roles are specific

to that HMC.
Passwords must be at least seven
characters.
Password expiration
Roles are configurable by task and
by resource.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-92. HMC user management AN113.0

Notes:
Under the HMC Management Work pane, a task is available for creating, managing custom
user accounts. As stated earlier in this unit, these HMC users are unique on this HMC.
The first task in the visual, Change User Password, allows you to change the password for
the account that you used to log in to the current HMC session. If you are logged in as a
different account than hscroot, you might find the options Manage User Profiles and
Access and Manage Tasks and Resource Roles unavailable and only the Change User
Password option available for you to change your own password.
The second task shown in the visual is Manage User Profiles and Access. This is where
you create new users, and modify other aspects of a user account.
The third task is Manage Task and Resource Roles. A task is a specific procedure that a
user might do, such as activate a partition, or create a user. A managed resource is a thing
that a user might perform a procedure on, such as a managed system, or a partition. When
you create a user account, you assign a task role, which has assigned to it one or more
tasks, and a managed resource role, which has one or more managed resources assigned
to it.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-113
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Change User Password

IBM Power Systems

Change current user password

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-93. Change User Password AN113.0

Notes:
This option enables you to change the current users password.

3-114 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Add or manage HMC users

IBM Power Systems

To add or manage users, choose HMC Management and then

Manage User Profiles and Access.
Access the User menu to add, modify, remove, or copy a user.

List of current user

accounts

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-94. Add or manage HMC users AN113.0

Notes:
To add an account, use the User > Add menu option. To change an account, use the User
> Modify option. To change the accounts password, use the User > Modify menu option.
The hscpe user
This user is created with the Service Representative authority for software fixes and
updates from your software support personnel. Support might need to log on to your HMC
using this username when analyzing a problem. Generally, this user is created after the
installation and setup of the HMC.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-115
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Add an HMC user (1 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

Password cannot
be less than
Select type of seven characters.
authentication

Select Managed Resource Roles

and one task role.
Custom roles appear in these
lists.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-95. Add an HMC user (1 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
Adding a user
This visual shows what happens when you click User > Add from the menu shown on the
previous visual. From here, you can type in the user name, a password, and a short
description. You must also select one of the task roles and at least one resource role to
assign to the user account. The resource roles define which resources (such as which
partitions) that a user can perform tasks on, and task roles define the groups of tasks that
the user can perform. By default, there is only one resource role that includes all of the
resources. More than one Managed Resource Role can be selected but only one Task Role
can be selected. The default task roles are listed as follows.
Also, you need to select the type authentication between local authentication, LDAP
authentication, or Kerberos authentication.

3-116 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty Modifying a user

If you were modifying a user rather than adding a new user, this screen would show you the
current settings for this user by highlighting the task role and the managed resource roles
assigned to the user.
Task role descriptions
Following is a general description of the default task roles. New roles can be created if the
default roles do not meet your requirements. A user can have only one task role.
Service representative (hmcservicerep)
A Service representative is an IBM service representative who is at your location to install
or repair the machine.
Viewer (hmcviewer)
A viewer can view HMC information, but cannot change any configuration information.
Operator (hmcoperator)
An operator is a user who is responsible for daily system operations. Tasks that an operator
cannot do include adding new users and changing the definitions of task roles.
Product engineer (hmcpe)
A product engineer is someone who assists in support operations. The differences
between the service representative task role and the product engineer task role are slight.
For example, the product engineer can shut down the HMC and close virtual terminal
windows, whereas the service representative cannot.
Super administrator (hmcsuperadmin)
The super administrator acts as the root user, or manager of the HMC system. The super
administrator has unrestricted authority to access and modify most of the HMC system.
The hscroot login account is set to have the hmcsuperadmin task role.
Default task roles definitions
To find out exactly what the default task roles are allowed to do, copy one of the task roles
and then modify the copy. In this way, you can list out the exact operations that a user with
this task role can perform. You must first make a copy because you cannot modify a default
task role. You can then delete the copy.
The default task role operations are also listed in the Information Center. Do a search for
HMC tasks to find this information.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-117
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Authentication methods
Users who remotely authenticate through Kerberos or LDAP must have their profiles set
appropriately. You must set the user profile of each remotely authenticated Kerberos or
LDAP user to use that type of authentication instead of local authentication. A user that is
set to use Kerberos or LDAP remote authentication will always use that type of
authentication, even when the user logs in to the HMC locally.
The use of Kerberos authentication requires configuration of a KDC server using the KDC
Configuration task. Use of LDAP authentication requires configuration of an LDAP server
using the LDAP Configuration task. You do not need to set all users to use Kerberos or
LDAP remote authentication.
If you select Local Authentication, type a password and a password confirmation in the
field provided. If you select Kerberos Authentication, type a Kerberos remote user ID. If
you select LDAP Authentication, no additional information is required.

3-118 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Add an HMC user (2 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

Specify
timeout
values if
needed.

Select Allow remote access or you

will get the following message:

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-96. Add an HMC user (2 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
When you click User Properties from the previous visual, you reach this window where
you can specify special properties for the user you are managing. If you want to enable
remote web server access for the user you are managing, select Allow remote access via
the web or you will encounter the message Remote Access is Prohibited when trying a
remote login using this user.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-119
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

HMC users: Resources and task roles example

IBM Power Systems

Resource role:
Selected resources Add user ID with
selected roles

Select the
resource role

Task role:
Selected tasks Select the
Task role

User sees only the selected LPARs

and selected tasks for those LPARs.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-97. HMC users: Resources and task roles example AN113.0

Notes:
HMC version 7 offers improved Task, Resource, and User assignment configuration. HMC
version 7 can be configured so that users see only LPARs and Tasks that have been
allocated to them.

3-120 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Task roles management

IBM Power Systems

Task roles define what tasks an account can perform.

One role is assigned to each user account when the user account is created.
Add new task roles to create custom task roles.
You can use the copy feature to copy a role and then alter it.
From the HMC Management work pane, click Manage Task and Resource
Roles.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-98. Task roles management AN113.0

Notes:
Each HMC user account must be assigned a task role when it is created. Each of these
roles allows the user to access different parts of the HMC or perform tasks on different
partitions.
You might want to add new user roles or to customize existing user-created roles. If you do,
remember that the changes occur only on the HMC where you did the customization. If you
want to customize the default roles, you will need to copy them first, and then perform the
customization on the copy.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-121
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Add task role example

IBM Power Systems

Then create an HMC user and

associate with it this task role:
DLPAROperator.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-99. Add task role example AN113.0

Notes:
The visual shows how to add a new custom task role. After clicking Add from the menu, the
Add Role window opens. Select one or more tasks in the web User interface permission
menu from left side window and click Add to add them to the right side window, which is
what will be configured for this task role.
Users created with task roles that only allow them to do certain tasks will have only those
tasks presented to them in the menus when they are logged in. For example, if the user is
not allowed to shut down a partition, then that option does not display on the HMC menus.

3-122 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Managed resource roles management

IBM Power Systems

Managed resource roles define the resources on which a user can

perform a task:
For example, a user might only be allowed to perform tasks on a particular
managed system or partition.
Unlike tasks roles, more than one managed resource role can be associated
with a user.
Add new managed resource roles to create custom roles:
You can use the copy feature to copy a role, and then alter.
From HMC Management work pane, click Manage Task and Resource
Roles.

Example
custom role

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-100. Managed resource roles management AN113.0

Notes:
In the visual the Managed Resource Roles option has been selected; so the list of current
managed resource roles is listed.
A managed resource is a resource on which an action can be performed, such as a
partition or a managed system.
You can create a managed resource role with multiple resources, and then add just one
named managed resource role to a user, or you can create separate, specific managed
resource roles, such as one per partition and managed system.
One HMC can be connected to several managed systems. You might want to create users
that can only perform operations on one or more managed systems. You will need to create
managed resource roles for the managed systems to accomplish this.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-123
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Add managed resource role example

IBM Power Systems

Select a managed
system and then a
logical partition.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-101. Add managed resource role example AN113.0

Notes:
Users created with managed resource roles that only allow them to have access to certain
resources will only have those resources available to them when they are logged in.
The procedure for creating a managed resource role is similar to a task role. Click Add on
the Customize User Controls menu, type a new name, choose available objects from the
window on the left, then click Add to add them to the list of current objects for this managed
resource role.

3-124 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Copy User
IBM Power Systems

Select the user.

Select Copy.
Type a name.
Click OK.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-102. Copy User AN113.0

Notes:
A quick way to create another user is to do the copy function. Notice that you can also
make changes to the new ID.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-125
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

HMC remote access options

IBM Power Systems

Web user interface

Command line interface (CLI)
SSH access
to HMC
HMC commands

Network

Web
browser

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-103. HMC remote access options AN113.0

Notes:
Web browser requirements
HMC web browser support requires HTML 2.0, JavaScript 1.0, Java virtual machine (JVM),
and cookie support in browsers that will connect to the HMC.
SSH connection
You can use a Secure Shell (SSH) connection directly to the HMC. When you log in, you
are given a restricted shell. Most partition management commands can be executed using
this restricted shell command line. There are also a limited number of Linux commands
available. Use the shell command echo $PATH after you log in to see which directories are
available. A listing of these directories will show the commands available. To see usage
information, run the commands with the --help option.
Make sure the remote command line interface access to the HMC is enabled.

3-126 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Remote CLI access: Secure shell

IBM Power Systems

Install SSH client on workstation.

One example is PuTTY (freeware).
Enter HMC host name or IP address.
Sign on to HMC.
HMC user profile/password

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-104. Remote CLI access: Secure Shell AN113.0

Notes:
PuTTY is a free implementation of Telnet and SSH for Windows and Unix platforms, along
with an xterm terminal emulator. Your can obtain more information about PuTTY at
http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty/.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-127
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Remote web access

IBM Power Systems

Launches as a separate
window.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-105. Remote web access AN113.0

Notes:
The remote client is launched as a separate window. Make sure that browser is configured
to allow pop-ups; otherwise, you will not be able to launch the remote client.

3-128 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Browser settings: Firefox

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-106. Browser settings: Firefox AN113.0

Notes:
Under the Tools Options window, you can add the exception for pop-ups for your HMC.
You do this by adding the IP address or host name in the Address of Website field and
clicking Allow.
To enable the JavaScript option to raise and lower windows, click the Advance tab on the
Options window and check the Raise or lower windows check box. Then click OK.
Also note that one can uncheck the Block pop-up windows box as well.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-129
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Browser settings: Internet Explorer

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-107. Browser settings: Internet Explorer AN113.0

Notes:
Internet Explorer has a similar set of options that will need to be verified for remote HMC
operations.

3-130 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC firewall settings

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-108. HMC firewall settings AN113.0

Notes:
Firewall settings for the HMC adapter must be enabled for the remote HMC to work. Port
443 is enabled to allow remote browser access, port 22 enabled allows remote secure
shell.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-131
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Remote logon
IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-109. Remote logon AN113.0

Notes:
This visual provides a view of the HMC remote web UI login link. It also gives you a brief
color coded status of the managed system.

3-132 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Enabling remote browser access

IBM Power Systems

Needs to be enabled using the local/physical HMC interface.

HMC firewall port 443 enabled (secure remote web access).

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-110. Enabling remote browser access AN113.0

Notes:
Enable the HMC remote access
Open the Remote Operation task from the HMC Management Work pane. Select
Enabled from the Remote Operation drop-down list and then click OK.
The HMC can be accessed from a remote workstation using a web browser. All remote
browser access the HMC must use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-133
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Enable or disable remote options

IBM Power Systems

SSH to the HMC to perform management tasks remotely:

HMC Management > Remote Command Execution
Must also open the HMC firewall for SSH access.

Remote access to LPAR virtual terminals (consoles):

HMC Management > Remote Virtual Terminal
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-111. Enable or disable remote options AN113.0

Notes:
Enabling remote HMC commands (SSH)
Recall that the remote HMC commands allow you to perform many partition management
operations from a remote command line. From this secure shell, you can execute remote
HMC commands to do things like activate a partition or query its status.
By default, the HMC does not allow SSH sessions so you must enable this function using
the Remote Command Execution task from the HMC Management work pane. Select the
check box labeled Enable remote command execution using the ssh facility in the
Remote Command Execution window.
Enabling remote virtual terminals
Another remote option available from the HMC Management Work pane is a tool that
allows you to enable or disable the ability to use remote virtual terminal windows to the
partitions (that is, remote console windows). Simply click the Remote Virtual Terminal
task in the work area and select the Enable remote virtual terminal connections.

3-134 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Using remote HMC commands (1 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

Install SSH (if necessary) on client.

There are multiple ways to run commands using SSH.
Single HMC command (you will be prompted for password):
$ ssh -l hscroot hmc hmccommand
Alternative single HMC command syntax:
$ ssh hscroot@hmc hmccommand
Log in to the HMC and execute commands in a shell:
$ ssh -l hscroot hmchost
hscroot@hmc's password:
Last login: Thu May 5 12:03:12 2008 from console
hscroot@hmc> date
Tue Mar 6 15:45:22 CET 2012

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-112. Using remote HMC commands (1 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
HMC command line options
The visual shows how to use SSH from a remote command line, such as a Linux or AIX
shell. To run HMC commands remotely, you can either send one command to the HMC as
shown in the first example, or log in to the restricted shell using SSH and run any number of
commands. Exit out of the SSH shell when you are done. SSH encrypts network
communications for security.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-135
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Using remote HMC commands (2 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

Commands have --help option and man pages.

Example commands include:
Show processor usage by partition.
$ lshwres -m msname -r proc --level lpar \
F lpar_name,run_procs --header
lpar_name,run_procs
LPAR1,0
LPAR2,1
LPAR3,0
Reboot the HMC immediately.
$ hmcshutdown t now r
Show HMC network configuration.
$ lshmc -n
List system connections.
$ lssysconn r all
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-113. Using remote HMC commands (2 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
HMC commands
When you have logged in, you can execute the echo $PATH command to see which
directories are available to you in the HMCs restricted shell. You can only run the
commands in these directories and the shell commands are restricted as well.
List each of the directories listed in the echo $PATH output to see a listing of the commands
that are available. For usage information, run the commands with the --help option or
access the man pages. For example, man hmcshutdown will display the manual page for
that command. The man pages show more information than the --help information.

3-136 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

SSH login environment on the HMC

IBM Power Systems

HMC provides restricted shell:

SSH is a secure shell program.
It is the only remote login method to access HMC command line.
Passwords and public key authentication are in use.
Need to contact IBM technical support for a temporary root access.
Example operations that are not allowed include:
cd, redirection, su
All the commands are listed in the following paths:
hscroot@hmc> echo $PATH
/hmcrbin/:/usr/hmcrbin
For example, under /hmcrbin:
hscroot@hmc> ls /hmcrbin/
cat ls netstat ping6 sort uname
date mount ping sleep umount

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-114. SSH login environment on the HMC AN113.0

Notes:
Restricted shell environment
As SSH is the only remote login method, and the default shell startup files are copied at
each login, you get a restricted shell. This is true even if you bring up a shell on the physical
HMC. Users, even hscroot, cannot run the su command.
The only way to escape from the restrictions is to obtain access to the root shell. If
necessary, IBM Technical Support can supply a password that allows you to access a shell
where you can su to root. This is covered on the next visual.

Warning

The restricted shell controls are for the protection of the HMC environment. The
configuration of the HMC is much more complex than just a Linux system and if you were
able to alter system files, your HMC might become unusable and you will need to reload
the software.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-137
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

HMC CLI: What is available then? (1 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

sed and scp are available.

Can list out directories and cat files outside of $PATH.
HMC commands allow you to manually run commands that
are in the web browser user interface:
You can write scripts.
Commands have man pages.
Temporary (one day) root access can be obtained with IBM
approval:
It requires a good reason and opening a call.
You will need to create a service user named hscpe and retrieve HMC
serial number (lshmc v).

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-115. HMC CLI: What is available then? (1 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
You can edit files with sed and remotely copy files with scp. You can list the contents of
directories and cat files. You can list out directories if you know their names. Because you
cannot use the cd command, you need to provide full path names to explore the system.
You can enable vi command line editing with the set -o vi command.
rnvi command
rnvi - HMC restricted-nvi text editor: rnvi enables users to edit a text file
in a restricted mode. The rnvi command invokes the nvi command in a chroot
environment. The rnvi command must be issued from the user's home directory and only
one file can be specified on the command line.

3-138 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty HMC commands

To list the commands that are available, use echo $PATH to see which directories are
available, then list the contents of each directory in turn. For example:
hscroot@hmc> echo $PATH
/hmcrbin/:/usr/hmcrbin
hscroot@hmc> ls /hmcrbin
cat date ls mount netstat ping ping6 sleep sort umount uname
If you have to administer several managed systems, you can achieve consistent results by
using the command-line interface. The command sequence can be stored in scripts and
run remotely.
After you have developed a consistent way to manage the managed systems, you can
automate the operations by invoking the scripts from batch-processing applications, such
as the cron daemon, from other systems.
More information on commands in the Information Center
If you search for HMC tasks in the Information Center search window, you will see not only
the list of tasks each default task role can perform, but it also lists out the HMC command
that corresponds to each task.
Scripts with HMC commands
You can write scripts that contain ssh commands that run HMC commands. When you run
this script on a system, the ssh commands in the script run the HMC commands remotely
on the HMC. You will need to configure SSH between the remote system and the HMC to
allow for remote HMC commands without requiring the hscroot password.
An example line in a script might look like the following where lssyscfg is an HMC
command, hmcname is the HMCs host name, and msname is the managed system name:
ssh -l hscroot hmcname "lssyscfg -r lpar -m <msname> -F state,lpar_id"

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-139
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

HMC CLI: What is available then? (2 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

You can shut down or reboot HMC remotely from web

browser or use command line.
You can open remote virtual terminals to partitions:
Use mkvterm or vtmenu.
mkvterm example:

Enter at mkvterm m <managedsystem> --id <lparID>

HMC shell
prompt
AIX Version 7
Copyright IBM Corporation, 1982, 2010.
Console login:
Enter ~. to end Last login: Tue Mar 6 17:21:47 2012 on /dev/vty0
(can log out # ~.
first) Terminate session? [y/n]

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-116. HMC CLI: What is available then? (2 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
Remote HMC reboot
You can use the command line if you want to reboot the HMC remotely. We saw this
command earlier in this unit:
hmcshutdown -t now -r
You can also shutdown or restart the HMC using Shut Down or Restart task from the HMC
Management Work pane.
Remote virtual terminals (partition consoles) with mkvterm command
You can open a remote virtual terminal to a partition with the mkvterm command. You will
be in a shell to the partition. When you are done, log out, and type ~. to end the session
and return to the HMC shell. An alternate syntax for the mkvterm command shown in the
visual is as follows, where managedsystem is replaced with the actual managed system
name and lparname is replaced with the partition name:
mkvterm -m managedsystem -p lparname

3-140 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty Closing a remote terminal

If a remote terminal to a partition is already open, you will receive an error. Use the
rmvterm command to remove that other connection so that you can make one. Hopefully,
someone is not actively using that other remote terminal.
Remote virtual terminals with vtmenu command
The vtmenu HMC command will list a menu of partitions for you to choose. After you
choose one, it opens a remove virtual terminal to that partition.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-141
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Remote access security: Overview

IBM Power Systems

Review:
HMC and service processor use SSL for secure communications.
HMC users and tasks are unique to each HMC.
HMC firewall options on the Ethernet interface.
Restricted SSH for HMC command line access.
SSH and remote console access can be disabled or enabled.
Secure remote web access can be disabled or enabled.
Additional security topics:
Virtual console communications:
SSL encrypted when using remote web connection.
Uses SSL also when using the physical HMC.
Can configure HMC access without a password.
Web browser to HMC communications:
SSL encrypted by default.
Certificate authority is issued by the HMC (self-signed certificate).
Can create a new self-signed certificate or a certificate signed by a trusted
third party.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-117. Remote access security: Overview AN113.0

Notes:
HMC and managed system use SSL
The HMC to service processor private network uses SSL for a secure connection. For SSL,
we need user IDs and passwords on the service processor and there are default user IDs
admin and general already set up, and an additional HMC user ID when HMC is
connected.
The service processor issues the SSL certificate and this SSL connection is established
when the managed server is added to the HMC. When you connect the HMC to the
managed system and apply power, and the state of the managed system is Pending
Authorization, click the managed system name and you will be prompted to set up the three
passwords. Be sure to document these in a safe place.

3-142 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Topic 2: Checkpoint
IBM Power Systems

1. Which of the following statements about HMC users are true?

a. When you create an HMC user, it exists only on that HMC.
b. Task roles describe the procedures that users can perform.
c. You can set multiple task roles and multiple managed resource
roles for a user.
d. A user with a custom task role can be created which allows the user
to access only the HMC command line and not the web browser
user interface.

2. List HMC remote access options.

3. What must be configured to provide SSH access to the HMC command

line?

4. True or False: The communication between a remote web browser and

the HMC is SSL encrypted by default.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-118. Topic 2: Checkpoint AN113.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-143
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM Power Systems

1. Which of the following statements are true?

a. When you apply power to the managed system, the service processor searches
for a DHCP server for its IP address.
b. If it does not find a DHCP server, it waits for one to contact it.
c. The IP address for the service processor can be set to any valid IP address.
d. The network configuration for the service processor can be changed in the ASMI
application.

2. True or False: An important part of setting up the managed system connection

to the HMC is to not apply power to the managed system until the HMC is
configured.

3. True or False: The virtual console communications are encrypted.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-119. Checkpoint (1 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:

3-144 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM Power Systems

4. How do you reboot the HMC remotely?

5. What is the difference between a user account and a task role?

6. Besides the firewall options, what are the remote access options
that can be enabled or disabled on the HMC V7?

7. True or False: The HMC can be used as a fully functional Linux

system.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-120. Checkpoint (2 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-145
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Exercise: Exploring the HMC V7 interface

IBM Power Systems

Unit
exerc
ise

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-121. Exercise: Exploring the HMC V7 interface AN113.0

Notes:

3-146 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit summary
IBM Power Systems

Having completed this unit, you should be able to:

List the LPAR-related functions of the HMC
Describe how to connect the HMC to the managed system
Describe the new HMC version 7 web-based management console and
the web user interface (WUI) structure
Use the Guided Setup wizard for HMC network configuration
Add a managed system to the HMC application
Reboot the HMC
Configure the HMC network parameters
Create HMC users
Configure and assign task roles and managed resource roles
Configure HMC remote access options
Enable and disable remote virtual console support
Log in to the HMC command line and use HMC commands
Describe security options for HMC communication

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 3-122. Unit summary AN113.0

Notes:
More summary information:
The HMC is a separate system that is required to create and manage partitions.
The HMC is connected to one or more managed systems with an Ethernet connection.
The Guided Setup wizard can be used to set up a new HMC.
- Including users, date/time, and the network configuration.
HMC menus allow you to configure the HMC and manage partitions and managed
systems.
- Including access to the partitions consoles and service tools.
Remote access options allow you to use the HMC from the network:
- Web connection and command line options.
- Communications are SSL encrypted by default.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 3. Hardware Management Console 3-147
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

3-148 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty Unit 4. Hardware Management Console

maintenance

What this unit is about

This unit describes the procedures for performing maintenance tasks
on the HMC and the managed system.

What you should be able to do

After completing this unit, you should be able to:
Back up critical console data
Schedule regular critical console data backups
Describe the following procedures:
- Install corrective service code on the HMC
- Prepare for an HMC upgrade
- Perform an HMC upgrade
- Perform an HMC reload
- Install managed system firmware updates.

How you will check your progress

Accountability:
Checkpoint questions
Machine exercises

References
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/systems/index.jsp
IBM System p and AIX Information Center
http://www-03.ibm.com/systems/power/software/virtualization/index.
html
IBM PowerVM web portal
https://www14.software.ibm.com/webapp/set2/sas/f/hmc/home.html
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
IBM Technical Support websites

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance 4-1
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Unit objectives
IBM Power Systems

After completing this unit, you should be able to:

Back up critical console data
Schedule regular critical console data backups
Describe the following procedures:
Install corrective service code on the HMC
Prepare for an HMC upgrade
Perform an HMC upgrade
Perform an HMC reload
Install managed system firmware updates

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-1. Unit objectives AN113.0

Notes:
This unit discusses the maintenance of the software and configuration information on the
HMC. It also describes how to perform firmware updates for the managed system.

4-2 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

The major maintenance components

IBM Power Systems

Server firmware:
POWER Hypervisor
Flexible Service Processor (FSP)
Bulk Power Controller (BPC)

HMC
Updates and upgrades

Partition maintenance: OS
AIX, IBM i, Linux

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-2. The major maintenance components AN113.0

Notes:
This visual depicts the three major pieces of maintenance.
But before we initiate any updates, let us first perform a backup of the entity we need to
update, for example the HMC.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance 4-3
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Backup critical console data (1 of 3)

IBM Power Systems

Back up critical console data to a media on local system, mounted

remote system, or send critical data to a remote site.
Used for restoring HMC data during HMC recovery
Backup data includes:
HMC user configuration
HMC configuration (network)
HMC log entries
Any partition profile data backup files
Applied corrective service updates (service packs, OS security updates)
Backup does not include:
List of scheduled operations
Remote command execution setting
Can schedule backup operations for a specific time or schedule them to
repeat.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-3. Backup critical console data (1 of 3) AN113.0

Notes:
Back up the HMC after you have made changes to the HMC configuration or to the
information associated with partitions. You can set up an automated backup of critical
console data through the HMC Management > Schedule Operations task from the HMC
workplace window.
Backup critical console data
The visual lists the types of items that are backed up as part of a critical console data
backup. Basically, it is every configurable item on the HMC with the exceptions of the
scheduled operations and enable/disable settings for remote access to the HMC. Be sure
to document these items manually and remember to reconfigure them if you need to
re-install the HMC software. The HMC software itself is not backed up as part of this
procedure.
When you save HMC data, you cannot choose which pieces of the software you want to
save. The HMC saves all pertinent configuration.

4-4 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty Partition profile data

Recall that when you perform a backup of profile data for all the partitions using this option,
select Configuration > Manage Partition Data > Backup. Backup files of the profile data
are created on the HMC hard drive. These backup files are saved in the Back up Critical
Console Data operation.
Even if you have neglected to perform a backup operation of profile data, a backup file,
named backupFile, is written whenever you make a profile configuration change so this
backup will be saved as part of the critical console backup.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance 4-5
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Backup critical console data (2 of 3)

IBM Power Systems

Backup options

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-4. Backup critical console data (2 of 3) AN113.0

Notes:
The visual shows the window that opens after you click the Backup HMC Data task shown
on the last visual. You can back up critical console data to a media on local system,
mounted remote system, or send critical data to a remote site.
Click HMC Management in the navigation area and choose the Backup HMC Data task. If
the backup of critical console data will be to DVD-RAM, first you must format the DVD in
the DVD-RAM format before you can save data to the DVD. To format a DVD, click HMC
Management > Format Media.

4-6 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Backup critical console data (3 of 3)

IBM Power Systems

Back up to a remote system.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-5. Backup critical console data (3 of 3) AN113.0

Notes:
This window opens for the remote site information where the critical console data backup
file will be sent with FTP. Enter the server address, user ID and password and click OK to
perform the backup.
Remote site information
Enter the host name of the remote system where you want the backup file to be stored.
This host must be accessible on the network. The user ID and password are for the
account on the remote site and will be used in the FTP process to log in to the remote
system. The backup file will be placed in that user IDs default home directory. Make sure
there is enough room for the backup on the file system.
If you choose to save the backup file to a remote site, you will need to configure the HMC
network configuration information manually before restoring the rest of the HMCs
configuration from the backup file.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance 4-7
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Scheduling backups (1 of 2)
IBM Power Systems

The only HMC operation that can be scheduled is backup critical console
data.
You can schedule one operation or schedule them to repeat.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-6. Scheduling backups (1 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
You can schedule critical console data backups to occur at sometime in the future and you
can schedule backups to happen regularly. To get to this feature, Select HMC
Management > Schedule Operations from the HMC workplace window. Then in the
Customized Scheduled Operations window, click Options > New. The Add an Operation
window opens. Click the only option available: Backup Critical Console Data. Click OK to
continue.

4-8 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Scheduling backups (2 of 2)
IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-7. Scheduling backups (2 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
Schedule date and time
This option enables you to schedule the date and time for backing up critical console
information. You must provide the time and date that you want the operation to occur.
You can schedule a backup to occur once, or you can set up a repeated schedule. For a
repeated schedule, click the Repeat tab.
Schedule single or repeat operations
Specify either a single or repeated operation. Refer to the unit about dynamic resource
allocation for more information about scheduling operations.
The interval specifies the time between operations and the example in the visual above
shows that this operation will happen every other week (that is, two weeks between each
operation). Repetitions is how long you want the operations to continue.
Click Save to save the new operation.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance 4-9
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Check HMC code

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-8. Check HMC code AN113.0

Notes:
Just hover the cursor over the HMC Version on the Welcome screen or select Updates. Or
under Updates task group in the navigation area: View of all Power servers managed by
this HMC showing the installed Power firmware levels.

4-10 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC update methods

IBM Power Systems

There are two methods of HMC software release

upgrades:
Install from removable media.
To install corrective service from CDs or DVDs which you can order
from Fix Central or which you can create yourself by downloading ISO
images from Fix Central.
Install from a remote system (one of your remote systems or the
Internet).
To install corrective service from ZIP file images which you can
download to one of your remote systems that accepts FTP requests.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-9. HMC update methods AN113.0

Notes:
Install corrective service from removable media (CD-ROMs)
Use this method to install corrective service from CDs or DVDs which you can order from
Fix Central or from your IBM service representative, or which you can create yourself by
downloading ISO images from Fix Central, and then burning your own CDs.
Install corrective service from a remote system (ZIP files)
Use this method to install corrective service from ZIP file images which you can download
to one of your remote systems that accepts FTP requests, or which you can install from the
Internet.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance 4-11
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

HMC corrective service

IBM Power Systems

A corrective service is a minor software update or fix.

It typically changes the minor version level.

HMC corrective service information and downloads can be

obtained from through Fix Central.

Procedure:
Perform a critical console data backup (just in case).
Download iso file from Internet (or obtain a CD-ROM with the fix).
From the HMC Install Corrective Service application, install the fix.
Updates > Update HMC (button)
Reboot HMC.
Check that the version level is what you expect.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-10. HMC corrective service AN113.0

Notes:
A corrective fix updates the minor version level of code on the HMC. Corrective fixes can
be obtained by ordering them on a CD-ROM or by downloading them either to the HMC
itself or to a remote system that the HMC is able to connect to using FTP or mountable file
system. Monitor the IBM HMC Corrective Fixes website to find out about corrective fix
information and obtain downloads.
Before installing corrective service on the HMC you should perform a backup of the critical
console data and locate the recovery CD media for the current HMC code level, to ensure
your current HMC is recoverable in the event of a problem. You should also determine what
level of code exists on your HMC.
HMC technical support website
The current IBM strategy for all maintenance tasks is to direct you the Fix Central.
There is a subscription service with which you can register and have notices sent to you
when there are HMC updates and security fixes available. This can be found at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/power/support, look for the link to Subscription Service.

4-12 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty Find the current level of HMC code

The current levels of the HMC version, release, and build are listed at the top of the
Updates application. Look under the heading HMC Code Level. When you know what level
of HMC software you have, check the IBM website to see whether fixes are available for
your software release.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance 4-13
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Install Corrective Service

IBM Power Systems

Choose how to install.

For network installation, enter file location and login
information.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-11. HMC Corrective Service AN113.0

Notes:
You can download the corrective fix file from the Internet directly to the HMC or to another
system that is accessible to the HMC from the network. One of the partitions on the
managed system works well for this.
Install corrective service
In the HMC workplace window, click Updates > Update HMC, the Install Corrective
Service window opens. This is the window shown in the visual.
Select the appropriate installation option, whether from media or from the network. The rest
of the steps shown below assume you chose the second option Download the corrective
service file from a remote system.
The HMC interface retrieves the update package from the remote FTP server and begins
the install process.
1. Reboot the HMC after the installation of the update has completed. Rebooting ensures
that all changes are available immediately.

4-14 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty 2. Verify a successful update. Check the HMC release level from the Updates workplace
window.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance 4-15
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (1 of 5)

IBM Power Systems

Enter the machine type

model number.
Use the wizard to
determine maintenance
target and compatibility
considerations.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-12. Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (1 of 5) AN113.0

Notes:
Fix Central provides fixes and updates for your system's software, hardware, and operating
system: http://www.ibm.com/support/fixcentral/.

4-16 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (2 of 5)

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-13. Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (2 of 5) AN113.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance 4-17
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (3 of 5)

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-14. Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (3 of 5) AN113.0

Notes:
In this example, assume the most HMC current level was V7R7.4.0.

4-18 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (4 of 5)

IBM Power Systems

After clicking Description to display more information:

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-15. Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (4 of 5) AN113.0

Notes:
This gives a detailed description of the HMC code update.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance 4-19
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (5 of 5)

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-16. Fix Central: Select HMC fixes (5 of 5) AN113.0

Notes:

4-20 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

HMC software upgrades

IBM Power Systems

HMC upgrade procedure:

1. Back up critical console data to DVD (just in case).
Do not make any configuration changes between this step and the
next.
2. Save upgrade data.
This saves data to special area on HMC disk.
3. Put new HMC product media in drive.
4. Reboot HMC.
5. Select upgrade when asked.
You will be prompted to insert second CD.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-17. HMC software upgrades AN113.0

Notes:
A software upgrade is different from a corrective service in that it is more than just a fix of
the current functionality. Look for new features, enhancements, and new applications when
you install a software upgrade.
When you are upgrading the HMC software at the same time that you will be updating the
firmware on the managed system, upgrade the HMC first so that it will recognize the new
version of firmware.
Save upgrade data
The HMC Save Upgrade Data task saves all of the HMC configuration information to a
special area on the HMCs hard disk drive. When you boot the HMC from the product
media and choose Upgrade (rather than Install/Recovery), it will load the HMC
configuration information from the special area. It will not ask you for a critical console data
backup.
In the procedure in the visual, the Back up Critical Console Data step is included just in
case something goes wrong during the software upgrade and you need to perform a full

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance 4-21
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

install of the HMC at the existing software level. See the HMC reload process in this unit for
more information about that procedure.
You should only save upgrade data immediately prior to upgrading your HMC software to a
new release. This allows you to restore previous levels if you need to recover the HMC. Be
aware that only one level of upgrade data is allowed. Each time you save upgrade data, the
previous level is overwritten.

4-22 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Prepare for HMC software upgrades

IBM Power Systems

This tool saves the HMC configuration information in a special area on

the HMC disk.
The HMC upgrade program will find this data and restore it.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-18. Prepare for HMC software upgrades AN113.0

Notes:
Save Upgrade Data
In the HMC workplace window, select HMC Management. Then in the tasks list, select
Save Upgrade Data. Select Hard Drive and click Next. Perform this task to store system
information in preparation for an HMC upgrade. When you complete this process, the HMC
saves configuration data, such as:
System preferences
Profile information
Service applications files

Note

Only perform this task immediately prior to upgrading your HMC software from one release
to another. Any configuration changes made after performing this task will not be migrated
to the new HMC software release.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance 4-23
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

HMC reload procedure

IBM Power Systems

What if you need to rebuild the entire HMC?

Example: HMC boot disk is replaced.
Reinstalling the HMC interface:
1. Insert the HMC product media into DVD-RAM drive.
2. Reboot the HMC.
3. Select the Install/Recovery process (not Upgrade).
4. When prompted, insert your backup DVD-RAM, if you have one.
5. HMC will need to reboot, after which install will continue.
6. When install is finished, verify the HMC level.
7. If necessary, restore remote critical console data backup (not on
DVD):
a. Set up HMC network parameters.
b. Use Restore HMC Data task under HMC Management to restore the
Critical Console Data backup.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-19. HMC reload procedure AN113.0

Notes:
If you replace the HMC, its hard drive, or for some reason need to perform a completely
new installation, you must reinstall the HMC product software and your configuration data.
Reinstalling the HMC
1. With the HMC powered off, place the HMC software product media in the DVD-RAM
drive. Power on your HMC.
2. When the HMC boots, a window opens with the following options:
a. Install/Recovery
b. Upgrade
3. Select the Install/Recovery option.
4. When the installation is complete, the DVD ejects from the drive. Remove the HMC
product media from the drive and close the DVD-RAM drive. Press Enter to reboot
HMC.

4-24 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty Additional steps

There are a few additional steps that might need to occur:
If the HMC needs to be upgraded because your Recovery CD does not include the
latest upgrades, you will need to perform the upgrade process.
You might need to check a few of the settings on the HMC after performing a new install
even when using a backup DVD-RAM. The enable/disable ssh settings and the
scheduled operations configurations are not backed up by the Back up Critical Console
Data operation.
Restore from a remote system (rather than DVD)
If the critical console data has been archived remotely, the network settings must be
re-configured manually to enable access to the remote system after the HMC is newly
installed. Then from the HMC Management workplace window, select the Restore HMC
Data task. Select the type of remote restore.
If you choose to restore from remote NFS server, follow the directions on the screen to
restore the critical console data. The data is then copied to the HMC from the remote
system and will automatically be installed when the system is rebooted.
If you choose to restore from remote FTP server, follow the directions on the screen to
restore the critical console data. The data is then copied to the HMC from the remote
system and will automatically be installed when the system is rebooted.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance 4-25
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Managed system firmware update (1 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

Managed system firmware (Licensed Internal Code) updates:

Server firmware
Power subsystem firmware
I/O adapter and device firmware

Types of firmware maintenance:

Concurrent (must use an HMC)
Disruptive
Reboot of managed system is necessary.
Deferred
Fixes can be installed concurrently, but they will not be activated until the
next IPL.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-20. Managed system firmware update (1 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
Firmware updates
The HMC provides methods for maintaining Licensed Internal Code (also called firmware)
for the managed system. You can choose to install fixes for POWER firmware through the
HMC or through the operating system. There are various types of firmware updates for the
server, the power subsystem, and various devices on the system. All of these can be
updated from the HMC.
These updates might be disruptive, in which case the managed system will automatically
reboot after the install, they might be concurrent which means the managed system does
not, and does not need to be, rebooted after the fix is installed. They might be also
deferred.
What does deferred mean? Concurrent levels of system firmware might, on occasion,
contain fixes that are deferred. These deferred fixes can be installed concurrently, but will
not be activated until the next IPL.

4-26 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Managed system firmware update (2 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

To examine
current LIC
levels

Firmware update

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-21. Managed system firmware update (2 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
HMC updates
If you need to upgrade to a whole new firmware release, this is done with the Upgrade
Licensed Internal Code to option. If you are upgrading to a new release, you can obtain
images from an online source; however, they must be applied from a CD-ROM. For
example, you might obtain the CD from IBM, or you might download an ISO image from an
online source and create your own CD. This CD is used to upgrade the release level of the
managed system firmware.
View current firmware level
The Updates pane displays the Hardware Management Console code level and the
system code levels (the current firmware level). But there is another way to determine your
current firmware level of the managed system is to select one managed system, then
select the View System Information option. A window will open and ask for the location of
the LIC repository. You can choose None, an IBM website, the IBM support system, and so
forth as locations.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance 4-27
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Examine current firmware level

IBM Power Systems

This example shows that the current permanent system firmware

image is AL710_099.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-22. Examine current firmware level AN113.0

Notes:
This visual shows that the current permanent system firmware image is AL710_099, and
the current temporary system firmware image is AL710_117.

4-28 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Obtaining new firmware

IBM Power Systems

Check http://www.ibm.com/support/fixcentral/ for latest level and

service pack:

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-23. Obtaining new firmware AN113.0

Notes:
Check the Fix Central website for the latest firmware level. Select the model number you
are interested in and click Continue. This will take you to a page listing all the firmware
updates for your system. Then click the Description link for more detailed information. The
description link has lots of information such as how to read firmware level names, how to
find the current firmware level of your system, how to download firmware, how to install
new firmware, and if the update is concurrent, deferred or disruptive.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance 4-29
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Change LIC for current release (1 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-24. Change LIC for current release (1 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
The next visuals show a series of windows that open when you choose the Change
Licensed Internal Code for option from the Updates workplace window of the HMC.
FTP site
An FTP server holds the server or power subsystem fix. It is any system on which you have
activated the FTP server protocol. Normally, your HMC only has the FTP client active.
The remote site can be IBM, if you are downloading the fix directly from there to your
managed system, or it can be another system where you have already downloaded the fix.
For example, you downloaded the fix to an FTP server yesterday. Today, you want to
retrieve the fix from the FTP server so you can download it to the server at your site.
You must specify the directory on the FTP server that holds the server or power subsystem
fix. You can specify the default directory /opt/ccfw/data, or you can change the directory
path if the fix is in a directory other than the default directory.

4-30 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty Change LIC wizard screens

The Licensed Internal Code (LIC) windows will show information on the type of update that
will be performed. If you click the View Information button will show the current release
installed on the system and the one you want to select.
When you install changes to your firmware, you have options:
Concurrent install and activate: Fixes can be applied without interrupting running
partitions and restarting managed system.
Concurrent install with deferred disruptive activate: Fixes can be applied as
delayed and activated the next time the managed system is restarted.
Disruptive install with activate: Fixes can only be applied by turning off the managed
system.
You want to choose the option that fits the status of the server that you are updating. For
example, you do not want to use a disruptive installation option on a server that is in
production. However, on a test server, this option might not be an issue.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance 4-31
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Change LIC for current release (2 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-25. Change LIC for current release (2 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
Accept the LIC agreement
Read through the agreement, and click Accept to proceed with the update.
Starting the firmware update
Click Finish in the final screen to proceed. You will then see a Starting operation status
message, followed some time later by a Completed status message.

4-32 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Checkpoint
IBM Power Systems

1. Can critical console data be restored on a different HMC?

2. True or False: Performing a Backup Critical Console Data backs

up all partition configuration data.

3. From where is your HMC configuration information restored

during the upgrade process?

4. From where is your HMC configuration data restored during the

installation/recovery process?

5. List two things that the Backup Critical Console Data option
backs up.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-26. Checkpoint AN113.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance 4-33
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Exercise: HMC and managed system

maintenance
IBM Power Systems

Unit
exerc
ise

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-27. Exercise: HMC and managed system maintenance AN113.0

Notes:

4-34 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Unit summary
IBM Power Systems

Having completed this unit, you should be able to:

Back up critical console data
Schedule regular critical console data backups
Describe the following procedures:
Install corrective service code on the HMC
Prepare for an HMC upgrade
Perform an HMC upgrade
Perform an HMC reload
Install managed system firmware updates

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 4-28. Unit summary AN113.0

Notes:
More summary information:
Critical console data backup can be done manually or be scheduled.
Corrective service code for the HMC can be installed from the HMC.
HMC software can be upgraded from the HMC.
The critical data on the HMC can be recovered and loaded on a new HMC installation
(disaster recovery).
The managed system firmware can be updated from the HMC.
- The update can be disruptive or concurrent.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 4. Hardware Management Console maintenance 4-35
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

4-36 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty Unit 5. System power management

What this unit is about

This unit describes the power on process for Power Systems servers.

What you should be able to do

After completing this unit, you should be able to:
Describe the role of the operator panel on an LPAR-capable
system
Power on a managed system using the following power-on options:
- Normal, system profile, or hardware discovery
Power off the managed system
Enable the Power Saver mode

How you will check your progress

Accountability:
Checkpoint questions
Machine exercises

References
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/systems/index.jsp
IBM System p and AIX Information Center

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 5. System power management 5-1
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Unit objectives
IBM Power Systems

After completing this unit, you should be able to:

Describe the role of the operator panel on an LPAR-capable
system
Power on a managed system using the following power-on
options:
Normal, system profile, or hardware discovery
Power off the managed system
Enable the Power Saver mode

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-1. Unit objectives AN113.0

Notes:

5-2 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Managed system power states

IBM Power Systems

Plug in managed system.

Level 1: Power off

The service processor is operational including ASMI.
All other system devices are powered off.

Issue power on command.

Level 2: Standby
All devices are initialized and powered on.
System is ready to support partitions.

Start first partition.

Level 3: Operating
System is running partitions.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-2. Managed system power states AN113.0

Notes:
This visual summarizes conceptually the three overall power levels for a managed system.
These should not be confused with the three power on options that will be discussed in a
few pages.
When the service processor is operational the Advanced System Management Interface
(ASMI) application can be accessed by using a browser to connect to the service
processors IP address. The ASMI allows you to set flags that affect the operation of the
system, such as auto power restart, and to view information about the system, such as the
error log and vital product data.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 5. System power management 5-3
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Level 1: Power off

The first power level is achieved by plugging in the power cord of the managed system into
a live power socket. The HMC will report that the managed system is in the Power Off
state. No additional buttons need to be pushed and no commands need to be issued.
The service processor will be initialized and the service processor software will be loaded
and run. If your system has an Operator Panel, you will see codes on the display panel and
after a few minutes, you will also see a steady blinking green light. The HMC will also
display the codes and status information for the managed system. At this point, the service
processor is an active host on the network. You can use the ASMI application on the
service processor; however, the rest of the devices, such as disks, processors, and so
forth, on the managed system are still powered off.
Level 2: Standby
To advance to the second power on level, a power-on command must be issued to the
managed system. At this point, all devices are initialized and ready to use however, no
partitions are running yet, so their devices are not yet in use. Do not attempt to remove
hardware from the system at this level. The HMC will report that the managed system is in
the Standby state.
Level 3: Operating
Once you start the first partition on the system, your managed system will be at the third
and highest power on level. The HMC will report the state of the managed system as
Operating. This means it has been fully powered on, initialized, and is running at least one
partition. With the proper procedures and commands, hot-pluggable devices can be
physically removed from the partitions.
When your managed system is in the Operating state, it remains there until you issue a
power off command or a system error changes the state. If you shut down all of the
partitions, but do not power off the managed system, the HMC will still report the Operating
state; however, at this point, the system is in a state functionally equivalent to the Standby
state.

5-4 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Managed system power on and off

IBM Power Systems

Physical power on button

Can be used for power on
HMC managed system power on command
Can choose power on options
Power off:
Use HMC power off command
Shut down partitions first before powering off managed system

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-3. Managed system power on and off AN113.0

Notes:
Basic power up
After the required cables are installed, and the power cables are connected, the power
button on the operator panel can be pushed to initialize the system.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 5. System power management 5-5
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Managed system power on options

IBM Power Systems

Power on options:
Normal
Hardware Discovery
System profile

Power on

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-4. Managed system power on options AN113.0

Notes:
The visual shows a managed system in the Power Off state. The HMC menu is shown
where you can choose to power on the system. This is the selected menu when the
managed system is selected. The next visual shows you the screen that displays after
choosing Power On on the menu.
HMC command for managed system power on
The chsysstate HMC command can also be used in an SSH session to change the state
of the managed system or partitions. Specific examples of power on commands will be
shown on the following pages.
Scheduling the managed system power on
If desired, you can schedule an automatic managed system power on for a particular date
and time and it can be scheduled to repeat. Select the server in the Systems Management
Work pane; then expand Operations menu in the Tasks Pad and select Schedule
Operations task. We will discuss scheduling operations in a later unit.

5-6 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Power on: Normal

IBM Power Systems

Select this option to specify that the HMC uses the current
setting for the partition start policy to determine how to power
on the managed system.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-5. Power on: Normal AN113.0

Notes:
Normal:
Select this option to specify that the HMC uses the current setting for the partition start
policy to determine how to power on the managed system. The current setting can be one
of the following values:
Auto-Start Always: This option specifies that the HMC power on logical partitions
automatically after the managed system powers on. If powering on the managed
system is the result of a user action, the HMC starts all partitions that are configured for
automatic start up. If powering on the managed system is the result of an automatic
recovery process, the HMC starts only those logical partitions that were running at the
time the system powered off. This option is always available for selection.
Auto-Start for Auto-Recovery: This option specifies that the HMC power on logical
partitions automatically only after the managed system powers on as the result of an
automatic recovery process. This option is available for selection only when the
firmware for the managed system supports this advanced IPL capability.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 5. System power management 5-7
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

User-Initiated: This option specifies that the HMC does not start any logical partitions
when the managed system powers on. You must start logical partitions manually on the
managed system by using the HMC. This option is available for selection only when the
firmware for the managed system supports this advanced IPL capability.
You can set the partition start policy from the Power On Parameters page of the Properties
task for the managed system. The Partition standby power on option allows you to power
on the managed system to a state where it will support the creation and activation of
partitions. No partitions will automatically start. You can use this option if you want to
manually activate partitions or if it is a new system that does not yet have any partitions.
The managed system state will be Standby.
The HMC command chsysstate can be used to power on or off the managed system.

5-8 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Power on: System Profile

IBM Power Systems

All servers system

profiles will be listed.
Select one and click OK.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-6. Power on: System Profile AN113.0

Notes:
System Profile
Selecting this power-on option specifies that the HMC power on the system and its logical
partitions based on a predefined system profile. When you select this power-on option, you
must select the partition profile that you want the HMC to use to activate logical partitions
on the managed system.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 5. System power management 5-9
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Power on: Hardware Discovery

IBM Power Systems

Capture information about all I/O devices in the managed system.

After inventory, managed system in operating state.
All logical partitions in power-off state.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-7. Power on: Hardware Discovery AN113.0

Notes:
Hardware Discovery:
Selecting this power-on option specifies that the HMC run the Hardware Discovery process
when the managed system powers on. The Hardware Discovery process captures
information about all I/O devices -- in particular, those devices not currently assigned to
partitions. When you select the Hardware Discovery power on option for a managed
system, the managed system is powered on into a special mode which performs the
hardware discovery. After the Hardware Discovery process is complete, the system will be
in Operating state with any partitions in the power-off state. The Hardware Discovery
process records the hardware inventory in a cache on the managed system. The collected
information is then available for use when displaying data for I/O devices or when creating
a system plan based on the managed system. This option is available only if the system is
capable of using the Hardware Discovery process to capture I/O hardware inventory for the
managed system.

5-10 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

System initialization (1 of 2)
IBM Power Systems

After power on, the system state will change and codes will
appear.
Codes can be seen in Reference Code column.

In the process of
powering on.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-8. System initialization (1 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
Managed system states
After we choose one of the power on options, the state of the managed system will change
from Power Off to Initializing. At this point, youll see many codes appear in the Reference
Code column.
After the system finishes initializing, the state might change to standby if partition standby
was the power on option. As soon as a partition is activated the managed system state will
change to Operating.
If the state is Authorization Failure, it means that your HMC and your managed system do
not agree on the password to use to communicate with each other.
Reference codes
You can view the latest codes that have appeared in the Reference Code column of the
Systems Management > servers work pane by looking under the Serviceability
application, clicking the Reference Code History option.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 5. System power management 5-11
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

System initialization (2 of 2)
IBM Power Systems

The managed system initialized and operational.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-9. System initialization (2 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
This visual shows an example of an HMC with its managed system in Operating state.

5-12 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Power Off managed system (1 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

First, shut down the operating system in each partition.

If you want to power off the system with before shutting down
the partitions:
You will get a window asking if you want to continue or not.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-10. Power Off managed system (1 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
Power Off
Powering off the managed system will make all partitions unavailable until the system is
again powered on.
Before you power off the managed system, ensure that all logical partitions have been shut
down and that their states have changed from Running to Not Activated.
If you do not shutdown all logical partitions on the managed system before you power off
the managed system, the managed system shuts down each logical partition before the
managed system itself powers off. This can cause a substantial delay in powering off the
managed system, particularly if the logical partitions are not responsive. Further, the logical
partitions might shutdown abnormally, which could result in data loss and further delays
when you activate the logical partitions once more.
The HMC command chsysstate can be used to power on or off the managed system.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 5. System power management 5-13
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Power Off managed system (2 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

Power off options

Normal power off is the recommended option.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-11. Power off managed system (2 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
After issuing the Power Off Managed System command from the menu, you must choose
between the Normal power off and the Fast power off.
Choose from the following options:
Normal power off: The Normal power off mode shuts down the system's operations in a
controlled manner. During the shutdown, programs running active jobs are allowed to
perform cleanup (end-of-job processing).
Fast power off: The Fast power off mode shuts down the system by stopping all active
jobs immediately. The programs running those jobs are not allowed to perform any
cleanup. Use this option when you need to shut down the system because of an urgent
or critical situation.

5-14 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Power Management
IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-12. Power Management AN113.0

Notes:
Power saver mode
Using this menu, you can reduce the systems power consumption by changing the power
saver mode. When the power saver mode is enabled, the system lowers the processor
voltage and clock frequency to reduce the power consumption.
Enabling the power saver mode on a managed system might affect the accuracy of any
performance monitoring tools that are running on the managed system. Changes to the
power saver mode take effect immediately without having to restart the managed system.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 5. System power management 5-15
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Checkpoint
IBM Power Systems

1. List at least two methods of powering on the managed system.

2. What are the different power on options for a managed system?

3. Which option powers up the system using a predefined list of

partition profiles?

4. What is the difference between normal and fast power off

options?

5. What HMC command can be used to power on or off the

managed system?

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-13. Checkpoint AN113.0

Notes:

5-16 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Exercise: System power management

IBM Power Systems

Unit
exerc
ise

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-14. Exercise: System power management AN113.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 5. System power management 5-17
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Unit summary
IBM Power Systems

Having completed this unit, you should be able to:

Describe the role of the operator panel on an LPAR-capable
system
Power on a managed system using these power-on options:
Normal, system profile, or hardware discovery
Power off the managed system
Enable the Power Saver mode

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 5-15. Unit summary AN113.0

Notes:
More review information:
Most systems have an Operator Panel
Typically, you use the HMC to power on systems
Power on a managed system using these power-on options:
- Partition normal, system profile, or hardware discovery
- Use HMC Server Management application or HMC commands
Power off the managed system
- Be sure to shut down partitions first
You can enable the Power Saver mode if your managed system hardware and firmware
support it

5-18 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions

What this unit is about

This unit describes the basic resource configuration rules for
partitions.

What you should be able to do

After completing this unit, you should be able to:
Describe the following partition concepts:
- Minimum partition configuration
- Maximum number of partitions
- Partition IDs and naming conventions
- Partition and system profiles
Describe basic processor and memory configuration options
Define minimum, maximum, and desired settings for memory and
processors
Describe I/O concepts and the required and desired settings
Use the Create Partition wizard to create a basic partition and a
default profile
Edit a partitions configuration

How you will check your progress

Accountability:
Checkpoint questions
Machine exercises

References
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/aix/v7r1/index.jsp
AIX 7.1 Information Center Information Center
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/aix/v7r1/index.jsp
IBM Systems Hardware Information Center

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions 6-1
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Unit objectives
IBM Power Systems

After completing this unit, you should be able to:

Describe the following partition concepts:
Minimum partition configuration
Maximum number of partitions
Partition IDs and naming conventions
Partition and system profiles
Describe basic processor and memory configuration options
Define minimum, maximum, and desired settings for memory
and processors
Describe I/O concepts and the required and desired settings
Use the Create Partition wizard to create a basic partition and
a default profile
Edit a partitions configuration
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-1. Unit objectives AN113.0

Notes:
The objectives list what you should be able to do at the end of this unit.

6-2 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Partition environment
IBM Power Systems

The HMC is chosen as the platform management interface.

When partitioned, select the LPAR environment.
Both processor mode and memory modes need to be selected.
Note: Shared memory LPAR is valid only when processor mode is
shared processor LPAR.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-2. Partition environment AN113.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions 6-3
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Partition resources
IBM Power Systems

Resources are allocated to partitions:

Processors, memory, and I/O slots

LPARs give you the flexibility to allocate resources depending on need

and not physical constraints.
LPAR 1 LPAR 2 LPAR 3 LPAR 4

Processors

Memory

I/O Slots

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-3. Partition resources AN113.0

Notes:
Divide system resources
The first step in planning for dividing up your systems resources into logical partitions is to
decide what partitions you will have and what resources will be assigned to each partition.
This step is usually done during the sales process so that you know how large a system
you need to purchase.
System resources
The system resources are processors, memory, and I/O slots. When allocating I/O slots,
the granularity is a single I/O slot, which means if several devices are connected to the
adapter in a slot, all of the devices are allocated to a single partition.

6-4 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Dividing the system resources (1 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

Minimum partition configuration:

0.1 processing units if using shared processor pool or
1 processor if dedicated.
128 MB memory
Access to necessary I/O devices:
Adapter for boot disk
Network adapters
Smallest granularity for allocating additional resources:
0.01 processing units if shared; 1 processor if dedicated.
1 logical memory block (LMB) of memory.
LMB sizes range from 16 to 256 MB.
One I/O slot
Maximum number of partitions depends on system model and
available resources:
Examples:
Maximum for our largest servers is 1024 partitions.
Maximum for a system with 4 physical processors is 40 partitions.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-4. Dividing the system resources (1 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
Logical Memory Block (LMB)
The LMB size determines the granularity of memory that can be allocated to a partition.
The LMB size varies between 16 MB and 256 MB, depending on the amount of physical
memory installed in the system. The default LMB sizes are as follows:
Total System Memory Default LMB size
4 GB or less 16 MB
Greater than 4 GB and up to 8 GB 32 MB
Greater than 8 GB and up to 16 GB 64 MB
Greater than 16 GB and up to 32 GB 128 MB
Greater than 32 GB 256 MB
The LMB size can be changed using ASMI and can be found under the Performance
Setting menu option. You will need to power-off and then power-on the managed system
for the change to take effect.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions 6-5
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Dividing the system resources (2 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

Profiles:
Partition profiles describe resources configurations for partitions.
System profiles are collections of partition profiles.
Custom groups
These group system resources in a single view.

Partition 1 Partition 2

ProfileA ProfileB ProfileC ProfileA ProfileB ProfileC

Partition profiles Partition profiles

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-5. Dividing the system resources (2 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
Partition profile
A partition profile is a named configuration of resources for a particular partition. A partition
can have multiple partition profiles. For example, on Mondays through Fridays, Partition 1
can be started with the profile named weekday, which contains a maximum of resources.
On the weekend, the same partition can be restarted with a profile named weekend, which
has a minimum of resources. Or, you might choose to use dynamic LPAR operations to
move resources.
When partitions are activated (started), you specify the partition profile by name.
System profile
A system profile is a named set of partition profiles. When you power on the managed
system you can choose to activate a particular system profile. A system profile is a list of
partition names and associated profiles that you want to activate.

6-6 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty Another benefit to system profiles, is that you can select its name and choose Validate
from the selected menu. This will check to see if there are any resource contention issues
and give you a report on detected conflicts.
Custom groups
Custom groups provide a mechanism for you to group system resources together in a
single view or a way to organize the systems or partitions into smaller business or workload
entities.
Custom Groups are comprised of logical collections of objects. You can report status on a
group basis, allowing you to monitor your system in a way that you prefer. You can also
nest groups (a group contained within a group) to provide hierarchical or topology views.
There can be one or more user-defined groups already defined on your HMC. There are
default groups listed under the Custom Groups node under Server Management. The
default groups are All Partitions and All Objects. You can create others, delete the ones
that were created, add to created groups, or delete from created groups by using the
Manage Custom Groups task.
Relationship between system and partition profiles
A partition profile belongs to a partition and its name must be unique for that partition. A
system profile is simply a collection of partition profiles.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions 6-7
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Creating partitions and profiles

IBM Power Systems

Each partition has at least one profile which contains a

configuration for a partition:
Might have more than one profile.
Each has a name unique to that partition (easily changed).
Access the profile properties sheet to view or change the
configuration.
Partition profiles are used when partitions are activated (started).
A partition's properties sheet is the current (in memory)
running configuration:
The running configuration might be different from the active profile
due to dynamic configuration operations (such as adding memory).
Partition's properties sheet is mostly read only; however, there are a
few dynamic (immediate) configuration options.
Partitions have an LPAR ID which cannot be changed on a
partition after it has been created:
Partition's name is easily changed.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-6. Creating partitions and profiles AN113.0

Notes:
Partitions and profiles
A partition has a name and an LPAR ID number stored in a table. The name can be
different from the host name of that partition and is easily changed.
A partition has at least one partition profile.
A partition profile is a defined set of resources and attributes that can be used to activate a
partition.
The active profile is the partition profile used when a running partition was last activated.
You view and change configurations through properties sheets. A partitions properties
sheet show the current, running configuration. A profiles properties sheet shows the
configuration that is saved and can be used the next time the partition is activated. There
are a limited number of settings in a partitions properties sheet and these are all dynamic.

6-8 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Memory resources (1 of 2)
IBM Power Systems

Memory allocation:
1 LMB (16 MB to 256 MB sized logical memory blocks)
For each partition, configure:
Minimum:
Partition will not start if this amount is not available.
Partition can be decreased to this amount if using dynamic LPAR.
Desired:
Partition will use up to this amount upon activation if available.
Maximum:
Partition can be increased to this amount if using dynamic LPAR.
Used for sizing the page table for the partition.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-7. Memory resources (1 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
Memory configuration
The system must be able to allocate the minimum amount of memory or the partition will
not start. The system will attempt to allocate up to the desired amount of memory, in LMB
size increments, when the partition is activated.
The minimum setting for memory is also the amount of memory to which you can
dynamically shrink the partition.
The maximum is the largest amount of memory that the partition can have if you add
memory dynamically. You cannot change the maximum amount of memory dynamically.
The maximum amount of memory is also the amount that is used when calculating the
amount of memory needed for the page tables to support this partition. For this reason, it is
not advantageous to set this maximum setting to an unreasonably high amount because it
would waste memory by setting memory aside for page tables that the partition doesnt
need.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions 6-9
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Memory resources (2 of 2)
IBM Power Systems

Valid memory ranges are based on a ratio of current and

maximum settings.
If you configure an invalid range, AIX will fail to boot:
Fatal Error: Unsupported Memory:MaxMemory Ratio
POWER5+ or newer servers running AIX 6 or later:
Ratio is 1:8192 (maximum is effectively limitless).
For all other scenarios:
Partitions configured with less than 256 MB of memory use a ratio of
1:16:
That is, the maximum cannot be >16 times current memory.
Example: 128 MB : 2GB
Partitions configured with 256 MB or more use a 1:64 ratio.
Example: 1 GB : 64 GB
The
The current
current memory
memory value
value could
could be
be as
as low
low as
as the
the minimum
minimum memory
memory setting
setting when
when aa
partition is activated, so use the minimum setting for the low value.
partition is activated, so use the minimum setting for the low value.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-8. Memory resources (2 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
Valid memory range details for all other scenarios
The all other scenarios referred to on the visual above means for:
Linux or AIX on servers that do not support 64K memory pages (POWER4 and
POWER5 processor based servers).
AIX V5.3 and prior versions running on POWER5+ or newer servers.
For these scenarios, the following rules apply:
For partitions that are initially sized less than 256 MB, the maximum size cannot be
more than 16 times the current size. This scenario is rarely seen these days since most
LPARs wont boot with less than 256 MB anyway, particularly if they have virtual
adapters or Integrated Virtual Ethernet adapter ports. If AIX starts to boot and hangs
with no error, it could be because it is not configured with enough memory.
For partitions initially sized 256 MB or larger, the maximum size cannot be more than 64
times the current size.

6-10 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Memory usage (1 of 2)
IBM Power Systems

Hypervisor memory: Address N

TCE Memory
Variable in size.
Increases with complexity of server

{
Partition 2
configuration.
Partition 2 Memory
TCE memory: "chunks"
Used for Direct Memory Access (DMA) to
I/O devices.
Fixed amount for number of I/O slots. Page Table

{
Page tables for each partition:

Partition 1
Used for mapping partition pages. Partition Memory
Size is 1/64th of partition maximum size. "chunks"

Partition memory
Amount you configure for the LPAR. Page Table

Hypervisor Memory
Address 0
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-9. Memory usage (1 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
Memory uses besides what you allocate to a partition
Factors influencing the Hypervisor memory requirements include the following: number of
logical partitions, partition environments of the logical partitions, number of physical and
virtual I/O devices used by the logical partitions, and the amount needed for page tables.
TCE memory is used to translate the I/O addresses to system memory addresses. This
is a global amount of memory allocated for the total number of I/O slots on a system
regardless of whether theyre actually used or not.
Page tables are used to map physical memory pages to virtual memory pages. Each
partition needs 1/64th of its memory size, rounded up to a power of 2, for page table
space in memory. The amount of page table space that is allocated is based on the
maximum memory setting in the partitions profile. Memory is allocated in LMB size
segments.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions 6-11
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Memory usage (2 of 2)
IBM Power Systems

Where is all the memory? Check the Managed Systems property sheet.

Memory not currently assigned

If AMS is configured, shared

memory pool will be part of
assigned memory

Reserved memory for hypervisor,

PTE, TCE

Everything adds up: 27.50+18.75+1.75=48

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-10. Memory usage (2 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
Where did the memory go?
You can check the current memory usage of a system by viewing the Memory tab in the
managed systems property sheet as shown in the visual. Select the managed system
name in the HMC System Management, click Properties from the menu, then click the
Memory tab.
Installed: Displays the total number of memory units that are installed on your
managed system. This number includes both active memory and inactive memory.
Deconfigured: Displays the total number of deconfigured memory units on your
managed system. This number includes both memory that has been deconfigured by
the system due to hardware failures and memory that has been manually deconfigured
using the service processor.
Available: Displays the amount of memory (in megabytes) that is available for partition
usage on the managed system. This memory is not currently assigned to any partition.

6-12 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty Configurable: Displays the amount of memory (in megabytes) that can be configured
on the managed system. This number includes memory that is currently assigned to
partitions on the system. If huge page memory support is available on the managed
system, the amount of configurable memory is reduced when huge page memory is
requested and allocated.
Memory region size: Displays the size of the memory blocks that can be assigned to
partitions. In logically partitioned systems, all physical system memory is subdivided
into blocks of a uniform size, which can then be individually assigned to partitions. Total
partition memory can be assigned in integer multiples of that size, either by editing
partition profile definitions or by selecting dynamic logical partitioning operations. The
default memory block size varies according to the amount of configurable memory in
the system.
Assigned to partitions: Displays the current memory assigned to partitions. This
number represents Configurable memory minus Available memory minus Reserved
memory.
Reserved: This field displays the amount of memory that the managed system needs
to manage the logical partitions on your managed system. This amount is calculated
based on the number of logical partitions on your managed system and the resource
amounts that you assign to each logical partition.
Active memory sharing support: Yes/no indicator displaying active memory sharing
support on current server.
Memory information can also be obtained using the following HMC command:
lshwres -r mem -m managedsysname --level sys

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions 6-13
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Processor resources
IBM Power Systems

Processor allocation:
Dedicated or shared processors
Increments can be in 0.01 processing units (for shared)
For each partition, configure:
Minimum:
Partition will not start if this number is not available.
Partition can be decreased to this number if using dynamic LPAR.
Desired:
Partition will use up to this number upon activation if available.
Maximum:
Partition can be increased to this number if using dynamic LPAR.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-11. Processor resources AN113.0

Notes:
Processor allocation
A dedicated processor can be assigned to only one active partition at a time. Shared
processing units are accessed from a shared processor pool.
Minimum resources are the resources that are required for a partition. If there are not
enough resources to meet this required minimum then the partition will not start. The
minimum setting is also the number of processors to which the partition can be reduced to
dynamically.
Desired resources are what you would like to have for normal operation of the partition.
When you start the partition, the system will allocate the number of available processors up
to the desired number.
The maximum setting defines the largest number of processors you can assign to this
partition. The HMC task for dynamic configuration of processors will not allow you to add
more processors to a partition that is already at its maximum limit.

6-14 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

I/O resources
IBM Power Systems

A partition requires a minimum of:

One boot device in allocated I/O slot.
One network adapter in allocated I/O slot.
Other I/O adapters for storage and network access.
I/O slots can be required or desired.
Allocation to partitions is by individual slots:
Multiple devices connected to a single SCSI adapter are allocated
together.
Empty slots can be allocated to a partition.
Useful if not able to allocate dynamically.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-12. I/O resources AN113.0

Notes:
Required versus desired
The partition will start only if all of the required slots are available and it will attempt to
assign those that are desired. Slots that are required cannot be dynamically removed or
moved from the partition.
You can allocate empty slots to partitions if you plan to add PCI adapters to the system at a
later time.
Mix of devices on a single SCSI adapter
Be careful of the mix of devices that you attach to a single SCSI adapter because it is the
adapter that is allocated to a partition (or more accurately, it is the slot that it is in). For
example, if you had a single DVD-ROM drive on a system and it was connected to the
same SCSI adapter as a partitions boot disk, you could not then reallocate that adapter to
another partition that might need to use that DVD-ROM device.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions 6-15
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Virtual SCSI devices

IBM Power Systems

Virtual SCSI configurations allow a client LPAR to use the physical

storage on a Virtual I/O Server partition.
Backing storage might be a logical volume, a physical volume, or an optical
media drive.
Must install and configure Virtual I/O Server (VIOS) software.
On the client, you need to know the virtual adapter ID that the server has
set up for that client.

The server configures Virtual I/O Client LPAR The client

a virtual SCSI server configures a virtual
Server (AIX or
adapter using the SCSI client
HMC. Linux)
adapter using the
HMC which points
to a specific Virtual
The backing storage I/O Server and its
is set up on the Physical Virtual device virtual adapter ID.
Virtual I/O Server storage
command line.
Adapter 14 Adapter 8
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-13. Virtual SCSI devices AN113.0

Notes:
Terminology
Virtual I/O is the term used to describe the ability to share physical I/O resources between
partitions.
Backing storage is the term for the physical devices that will be used as virtual devices for
client partitions. A backing storage device is associated with a specific virtual SCSI server
adapter. More than one device can be associated with a single virtual SCSI server adapter.
Virtual SCSI is a type of virtual device where a Virtual I/O Server is configured to allow
other partitions to use its disk or optical devices. These devices do not need to be SCSI
type devices; for example, the optical media drive is an IDE type device. The disks can be
whole disks or logical volumes on the Virtual I/O Server. When the client views the devices
from its operating system, it appears as an hdisk or a cd device. For example, if the Virtual
I/O Server configures a logical volume named lv_client1, in the clients operating system
this device is an hdisk.

6-16 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Virtual Ethernet options

IBM Power Systems

Two choices for virtual Ethernet, both configured with the

HMC:
Virtual Ethernet adapter:
Networking between multiple LPARs on same server.
Hypervisor acts as the Ethernet switch.
Virtual I/O Server can bridge the virtual Ethernet traffic to an external
network using a physical adapter.
This configuration is called a shared Ethernet adapter (SEA).

Integrated Virtual Ethernet adapter (IVE):

Also known as the host Ethernet adapter.
Physical adapter that can be shared by up to 16 or 32 partitions (depending
on the model purchased).
Each partition configures a logical port associated with a physical port on
the host Ethernet adapter.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-14. Virtual Ethernet options AN113.0

Notes:
Virtual Ethernet adapter
Virtual Ethernet adapters can be configured in multiple partitions on the same server and
these adapters appear as ent devices to the AIX operating system and eth devices to
Linux. To connect this virtual Ethernet to an outside network, a bridge called a Shared
Ethernet adapter can be configured in a Virtual I/O Server partition.
Integrated Virtual Ethernet adapter
This adapter, also known as the Host Ethernet Adapter, is a physical Ethernet adapter
integrated into many POWER7 servers. It is considered virtual because the physical ports
on this adapter can be shared by multiple partitions. A partition configures one of the logical
ports on the adapter and the logical port appears as an ent device to AIX or as an eth
device to Linux.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions 6-17
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Create a logical partition: System state

IBM Power Systems

The managed system must be powered on and its status

must be Operating or Standby.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-15. Create a logical partition: System state AN113.0

Notes:
The first step in creating partitions is to power on your managed system. You do this from
the System Management > Servers Work pane on the HMC. Any of the managed system
power on options will bring your system up to a state where partitions can be created.

6-18 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Create logical partition wizard

IBM Power Systems

Select a server in the work pane table; then click

Configuration > Create Logical Partition > AIX or Linux.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-16. Create logical partition wizard AN113.0

Notes:
To access the Create Logical Partition menu, select the server name in the Work pane
table (click the Select column). Select the Configuration task group from the tasks pad.
Expand the task group then, select the task, and then click Create Logical partition > AIX
or Linux. The task window opens. You can also use the context menu button (double right
arrows) that is displayed next to the object name you have selected. Click the button and
the task groups menu is displayed for that particular object. Click Configuration > Create
Logical Partition > AIX or Linux.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions 6-19
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Partition ID and name

IBM Power Systems

Enter a partition ID and name.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-17. Partition ID and name AN113.0

Notes:
After you specify the partition ID and name, click Next to proceed to the next wizard
screen.
Partition IDs
The first screen in the Create Logical Partition wizard allows you to set the partition ID and
the partition name. The partition ID will default to the next available number, but you can
override it. The partition ID number must be a whole number that is between one and the
total number of partitions that the system will support.
When your partition has an operating system and is booted, you can view its partition ID
and partition name with the AIX uname -L command or the lparstat -i command. For
example:
Partition name
The partition name can be very long and contain spaces. If you plan to use the command
line interface on the HMC, the partition names should be easy to type. Quotation marks will
need to be used on the command line if a partition name contains spaces.

6-20 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Profile name
IBM Power Systems

Enter a partition
profile name.

Check if this will be the only

partition and it will use all of the
resources on the server.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-18. Profile name AN113.0

Notes:
Partition profile name
A partition must have at least one partition profile, which contains the resource
configuration information. When you create a partition, you create the default profile. The
default profile can be changed to a different profile later. The default profile is the one that
is used when you activate a partition if you do not choose a different profile.
Like the partition name, the profile name can be very long and contain spaces. If you plan
to use the command line interface on the HMC, the partition names should be easy to type.
Quotation marks will need to be used on the command line if a profile name contains
spaces. Typically, profile names are descriptive of what is different between it and another
profile.
Use all the resources in the system check box
You can set a partition profile so that, when it is activated, the logical partition uses all of the
resources on the managed system. If you add additional resources to the managed

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions 6-21
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

system, and then activate such a partition profile, the logical partition automatically
recognizes and uses the resources that you have added.
Because all of the hardware (both required and desired) is assigned to this partition, no
other partitions can be started when this partition is running. Likewise, the partition that
uses all of the system resources cannot be started while other partitions are running.

6-22 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Set processor type

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-19. Set processor type AN113.0

Notes:
Set processor type
The first question about processors to answer in the wizard program is whether the
partition will use shared or dedicated processors.
When you click Next to proceed to the next page, the actual page you see will depend on
whether you specified shared or dedicated processors.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions 6-23
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Configure dedicated processors

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-20. Configure dedicated processors AN113.0

Notes:
Dedicated processors
Dedicated processors are allocated in whole numbers from one to the total number of
available physical processor cores.

6-24 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Configure shared processors

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-21. Configure shared processors AN113.0

Notes:
Configure shared processors
Configure the quantity of processing units for this partition.
Uncapped option
The Uncapped option represents whether you want the HMC to consider the partition
capped or uncapped. Whether a partition is capped or uncapped, when it is activated it
takes on a processor value equal to a number somewhere between the minimum and
desired processing units, depending on what is available from the shared resource pool.
However, if a partition is capped, it can gain processing power only through a DLPAR
allocation and otherwise stays at the value given to it at time of activation.
If the partition is uncapped, it can exceed the value set in Desired number of processing
units (while it is running, these are referred to as the LPAR entitlement) from the shared
processor pool that it needs. This is not seen from the HMC view of the partition, but you
can check the value of processors owned by the partition from the operating system level
with the appropriate commands.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions 6-25
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Memory settings
IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-22. Memory settings AN113.0

Notes:
The minimum, desired, and maximum settings are similar to their processor counterparts:
Minimum memory: Represents the absolute memory required to make the partition
active. If the amount of memory specified under minimum is not available on the
managed server then the partition cannot become active.
Desired memory: Specifies the amount of memory beyond the minimum that can be
allocated to the partition. If the minimum is set at 256 MB and the desired is set at 4 GB,
then the partition in question can become active with anywhere between 256 MB and 4
GB.
Maximum memory: Represents the absolute maximum amount of memory for this
partition, and it can be a value greater than or equal to the number specified in Desired
Memory memory. If set at the same amount as desired, then the partition is considered
capped, and if this number is equal to the total amount of memory in the server then this
partition is considered uncapped.

6-26 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Configure I/O slots

IBM Power Systems

Select the slot

first and then
click the
required or
desired
button.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-23. Configure I/O slots AN113.0

Notes:
Configuring physical I/O
On the I/O window, you can select I/O resources for the partition to own.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions 6-27
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Virtual I/O adapters setup

IBM Power Systems

Maximum virtual adapters value:

Must be greater than number of virtual adapters expected to be configured.
Cannot be changed dynamically.

Use the Actions menu to

add virtual adapters.

Specify the maximum number

of virtual adapters (default is
10 for AIX/Linux partition).

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-24. Virtual I/O adapters setup AN113.0

Notes:
Configuring virtual adapters
On the Virtual Adapters screen, use the Actions menu to create a new virtual SCSI or
virtual Ethernet adapter. This virtual Ethernet adapter is the virtual Ethernet in which the
Hypervisor acts as the network switch for partitions on the same server. The next visual
shows the screen for configuring the virtual SCSI adapter.
Maximum number of virtual adapters
By default, a new AIX or Linux partition will have the maximum number of virtual adapters
set to ten. This can be increased on this screen. This maximum number cannot be
increased dynamically while the partition is running, so be sure to increase this number if
you will need more than eight additional virtual adapters. If you do need to increase this
number later, you can make the change in the profile properties and re-activate the
partition.

6-28 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty Serial adapter

There are two serial adapters to support the partition console connections. Do not delete
these or make any additional serial adapters.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions 6-29
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Logical Host Ethernet Adapter (1 of 3)

IBM Power Systems

Choose an HEA to define an LHEA.

Choose which
physical port.
Click Configure.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-25. Logical Host Ethernet Adapter (1 of 3) AN113.0

Notes:
Logical Host Ethernet adapters (LHEA)
This LHEA is the integrated physical Ethernet adapter which can be shared with up 32
partitions. Each partition will configure a logical port on which is associated with a physical
port. All partitions configured for the same physical port will share the bandwidth of that
port.
This adapter is also known as the Integrated Virtual Ethernet (IVE) adapter.
Configuring a logical port
After having selected the physical port, the next step is to configure a LHEA port for that
particular logical partition by clicking Configure.

6-30 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Logical Host Ethernet Adapter (2 of 3)

IBM Power Systems

Select a
logical port
that is
Allow all
unassigned.
VLAN IDs.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-26. Logical Host Ethernet Adapter (2 of 3) AN113.0

Notes:
Use this window to select the logical port to use for the physical port that you selected in
the LHEA page. The logical partition will be able to connect to the physical port on the HEA
using the logical port that you select here.
You can also select VLANs in which the selected logical port can participate. The logical
port does not need to participate in any VLANs. You can set the logical port to participate in
all VLANs, or you can set the logical port to participate in up to 20 VLANs that you specify.
After clicking OK, you will return to the screen shown in the last visual.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions 6-31
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Logical Host Ethernet Adapter (3 of 3)

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-27. Logical Host Ethernet Adapter (3 of 3) AN113.0

Notes:
Once the Logical Host Ethernet Adapter port is configured, it appears in the LHEA table in
the column Logical Port IDs associated with the physical port of the selected HEA. The ID
numbers of the virtual LANs in which the logical port can participate are displayed in the
Allowed VLAN IDs column.

6-32 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Host Channel Adapter

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-28. Host Channel Adapter AN113.0

Notes:
HCA
Use this page to add Host Channel Adapter (HCA) resources to the partition profile. The
HCA resources are assigned to the logical partition when you use the partition profile to
activate the logical partition. If the selected HCA resources are not available, you cannot
activate the logical partition using the partition profile.
To configure HCA resources for this partition profile, select an HCA in the table and click
Configure to enter the appropriate information.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions 6-33
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Optional Settings
IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-29. Optional Settings AN113.0

Notes:
Connection monitoring
This determines if this partition will have its network connection with the HMC monitored by
service tools. If the partition is monitored, if there is a connection failure, it will be logged in
the service tools.
Automatically start with the managed system
If you want this partition to automatically start when you choose the managed systems
Partition Auto Start power on option, then select this check box.
Enable redundant error path reporting
Select this option to enable the reporting of server common hardware errors from this
logical partition to the Hardware Management Console. The service processor is the
primary path for reporting server common hardware errors to the HMC. Selecting this
option allows you to set up redundant error reporting paths in addition to the error reporting
path provided by the service processor.

6-34 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty Boot modes

You can set the default boot mode for this partition profile. When you activate a partition
you can override the default boot mode.
Normal: This option uses the normal boot list stored in the partition NVRAM.
System Management Services (SMS): This option does not use the normal boot list,
but instead stops at SMS upon activation of the partition.
DIAG_DEFAULT: This selection is similar to Power On Diagnostic Stored Boot List
Profile (DIAG_STORED), except the system boots using the default boot list that is
stored in the system firmware. This is normally used to try to boot diagnostics from the
CD-ROM drive. This is the preferred way to run stand-alone diagnostics. This can also
be used to boot from CD-ROM to install the operating system.
DIAG_STORED: This selection causes the system to perform a service mode boot
using the service mode boot list saved on the managed system. If the system boots AIX
from the disk drive and AIX diagnostics are loaded on the disk drive, AIX boots to the
diagnostics menu. This is the preferred way to run online diagnostics.
OPEN_FIRMWARE: This profile is used by service personnel to obtain additional
debug information. When this selection is enabled, the system boots to the Open
Firmware prompt.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions 6-35
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Check logical partition Profile Summary

IBM Power Systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-30. Check logical partition Profile Summary AN113.0

Notes:
Summary
The last page that displays when you create a partition is the Profile Summary page. Check
over all of the configuration settings that you chose. You can click Back to fix anything, or
click Finish to create the partition and its default profile.
Additional partition profiles
To create additional partition profiles, you can either copy an existing profile and edit it, or
you can create a new one. When you create new additional profiles for a partition, you will
see all of these screens again except the very first one where you set the partition ID.

6-36 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Editing a partition's configuration

IBM Power Systems

After a partition is created, you can edit its configuration from the
partition properties or from the partition profile properties.

Manage Profiles
screen:
Select profile name
and choose
Actions > Edit.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-31. Editing a partition's configuration AN113.0

Notes:
Editing the partition properties
Usually, a partitions properties are viewed to see the partitions current configuration.
There are a few configuration options available in the partition properties.
Editing the partition profile
There are two reasons to edit a partitions profile. First, you might need to change the
configuration and second there are some additional configuration options only available in
the profile after the partition has been created. The changes only take effect after the
partition is shut down and activated again.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions 6-37
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Additional configuration options

IBM Power Systems

Some additional options are only found in the partition profile properties.

BSR arrays

Huge Page
Memory

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-32. Additional configuration options AN113.0

Notes:
Barrier synchronization register (BSR) arrays
The BSR provides a means to accomplish barrier synchronization between software tasks
in a manner more efficient than utilizing standard memory based synchronization flags and
algorithms.
When the BSR capability is enabled, the managed system includes processors with BSR
arrays and supports the use of the BSR arrays on the processors.
Huge page memory
Power Systems servers support 16 GB huge pages, which are intended for use in
specialized high performance computing environments. The managed system must be
powered off to be able to create a pool of 16 GB pages. Once the pool has been created,
16 GB pages can then be allocated to the profile of a partition.

6-38 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM Power Systems

1. Match the terms minimum, desired, and maximum to the proper

description:
a. This is the upper limit of processors or memory that cannot be exceeded
when using dynamic operations.
b. This is the lower limit of processors or memory when using dynamic
operations.
c. This is the amount of processors or memory that a partition receives if there
are more than enough resources on the system when the partition is
activated (starts).

2. True or False: The amount of desired processors must always be

greater than or equal to the amount of minimum processors.

3. What is the minimum amount of memory for an AIX partition?

4. True or False: Empty I/O slots can be allocated to partitions.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-33. Checkpoint (1 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions 6-39
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM Power Systems

5. What happens if the minimum (or required) amount of a resource

is not available when a partition is activated?

6. How many processors is a partition allocated if, when it starts, it

has a minimum of three processors, desires five processors, and
four processors are currently available on the system?

7. What happens if a partition is currently running with its three

minimum processors but it desires five processors and another
processor becomes available after the partition is started?

8. What is the granularity of allocating processor resources when

configuring partitions?

9. When incrementing the amount of memory for a partition profile,

the minimum unit is how much?
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-34. Checkpoint (2 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:

6-40 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Exercise: Configuring logical partitions

IBM Power Systems

Unit
exerc
ise

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-35. Exercise: Configuring logical partitions AN113.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 6. Planning and configuring logical partitions 6-41
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Unit summary
IBM Power Systems

Having completed this unit, you should be able to:

Describe the following partition concepts:
Minimum partition configuration
Maximum number of partitions
Partition IDs and naming conventions
Partition and system profiles
Describe basic processor and memory configuration options
Define minimum, maximum, and desired settings for memory
and processors
Describe I/O concepts and the required and desired settings
Use the Create Partition wizard to create a basic partition and
a default profile
Edit a partitions configuration
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 6-36. Unit summary AN113.0

Notes:
More summary information:
Partition concepts:
- Minimum partition configuration
Processors, memory, I/O slots
- Maximum number of partitions depends on model and amount of resources
- Partition profiles contain resource configuration information
- System profiles are lists of partitions and profiles to start in a particular order
Minimum, maximum, and desired settings for memory and processors
Required and desired settings for I/O slots
Create Partition wizard leads you through creating partitions and profiles

6-42 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty Unit 7. Partition operations

What this unit is about

This unit describes the procedures for operations with partitions, such
as activating, stopping, and backing up partition profile data. Also
covered are ways to troubleshoot activation failures.

What you should be able to do

After completing this unit, you should be able to:
Activate and shut down partitions
Modify, copy, and delete partition profiles
Create, modify, delete, and activate system profiles
Open and close terminal windows
Change partition availability priority
Back up and restore partition profile data
Troubleshoot partition activation errors

How you will check your progress

Accountability:
Checkpoint questions
Machine exercise

References
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/systems/index.jsp
IBM System p and AIX Information Center

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 7. Partition operations 7-1

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Unit objectives
IBM Power Systems

After completing this unit, you should be able to:

Activate and shut down partitions
Modify, copy, and delete partition profiles
Create, modify, delete, and activate system profiles
Open and close terminal windows
Change partition availability priority
Back up and restore partition profile data
Troubleshoot partition activation errors

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-1. Unit objectives AN113.0

Notes:

7-2 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Web-based user interface: Systems Management

IBM Power Systems

Create, copy, delete, and back up system and partition

profiles
Activate partitions

Managed
systems

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-2. Web-based user interface: Systems Management AN113.0

Notes:
The Navigation pane in the left portion of the window, contains the primary navigation links
for managing your system resources and the HMC. This pane contains the primary
navigation links for managing your system resources such as the Systems Management.
When Systems Management is selected, its contents, which might include servers,
frames, and custom groups, are displayed in the Work pane. To view the partitions defined
on a server, you can select it from the Navigation pane on in the Work pane.
When a server is selected in the Navigation pane, the Work pane displays all logical
partitions defined on the server.
Functions in the Systems Management node
The bullets in the visual list some common tasks that are performed when using the
System Management node. You can create system and partition profiles, activate (start)
partitions, shut down operating systems, power on and off the system, watch the status
codes, and open virtual console windows.
The state column displays the current state of the managed system. Possible values are:

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 7. Partition operations 7-3

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Operating: The managed system initialized and is operational.

Power off: The managed system is powered off.
Initializing: The managed system is powered on and is initializing. The initialization
time might vary depending on the hardware and the partition configuration of the
managed system.
Pending authentication: The managed system is waiting for the service processor
password to be authenticated.
Failed authentication: The service processor password is not synchronized with the
HMC password.
Error: The operating system or the hardware of the managed system is experiencing
errors.
Error - Dump in Progress: The managed system encountered an error and is
performing a system dump.
Error - Terminated: The managed system encountered an error and has performed a
system dump.
On Demand Recovery: The anchor card (also known as the system VPD card) on this
managed system was replaced. You must enter replacement activation codes for
Capacity on Demand or Virtualization Engine system technologies. On/Off CoD
requests must be restarted.
Powering Off: The managed system is powering off normally.
Standby: The managed system is powered on using the Power on standby option. It
will stay in this state until a logical partition is activated. You can create and modify
logical partitions while the managed system is in this state.
Incomplete: The HMC failed to get all of the necessary information from the managed
system. Refresh the internal representation of the managed system on the HMC using
the Rebuild task. The Rebuild operation does not disrupt the operation of the running
server.
No Connection: The HMC is not connected or the handshake with the managed
system failed.
Recovery: The save area in service processor is not synchronized with the HMC
database.
Service Processor Failover In Progress: The primary service processor in the
managed system is performing an administrative failover and transferring system
management to the secondary service processor. This transfer is in progress.
Version Mismatch: This version of HMC is unable to manage the system. Update the
HMC Licensed Internal Code.

7-4 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty HMC command to determine managed system state

The HMC command to determine the managed system state is:
lssysscfg -r sys -m managedsysname -F state --header

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 7. Partition operations 7-5

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Activating partitions
IBM Power Systems

To start a partition, you activate it.

When a partition is activated:
You choose which partition profile to use.
What happens depends on the partition profile configuration.
Partitions can be activated by one of the following methods:
Activate a system profile.
Activate an individual partition.
Configure partitions to automatically activate when managed system is
powered on.
Schedule an operation.
Activations can be done either in the HMC interface or with the
HMC chsysstate command.
For example:
chsysstate -m msname -r lpar -o on -f profilename -n LPARname

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-3. Activating partitions AN113.0

Notes:
Activating partitions
To activate a partition means to begin the process to boot its operating system. Partitions
can be activated with a menu command in the HMC interface, at power on of the managed
system, as a scheduled operation, or when a system profile is activated. A system profile is
a named list of partitions and their profiles which are activated in the order in which they are
listed.
The managed system must be in the Standby or Operating state to activate a partition.
Partition boot options
One of the configuration options in partition profiles is the boot option. This can be set to
different values depending on the type of operating environment (that is, AIX/Linux or
IBM i) for which the partition has been configured. For example, you could set the boot
option to load the operating system or to stop at an open firmware prompt.

7-6 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Activate partitions with a system profile

IBM Power Systems

A system profile can be used to activate partitions either during system

power on or after it is already on.

Select system
profile name and
click Activate.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-4. Activate partitions with a system profile AN113.0

Notes:
You can start multiple partitions with one command by using a system profile. Remember
that a system profile is a named list of partitions and their profiles. All of the partitions in that
system profile will be activated in the order that they are listed.
The HMC does not wait until partitions operating systems are fully operational before
activating the next partition in the system profile list. So if there are dependencies between
partitions (such as with a Virtual I/O Server and its clients), you might need to start some
partitions first manually or have multiple system profiles.
You can use a system profile to start multiple partitions even if there are already partitions
running. If a partition is already running, you will get a warning, but the partition will not be
affected if a system profile attempts to activate it again.
Activating a system profile after system is powered on
1. Select the system name object in the working pane; then use the context menu button
or the Tasks pad to access the Manage System Profile window.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 7. Partition operations 7-7

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

2. Select one system profile; then click Actions > Activate. This is illustrated on the
visual.
Activating a system profile during power on of the system
When you power on the system, there are four power on options (this was covered in a
previous unit):
System Profile
Partition Auto Start
Partition Standby
Hardware Discovery
If you choose System Profile, you will be asked which system profile you want to use. This
option will be unavailable to you until you create a system profile.
HMC command for activating a system profile
You can use the chsysstate command to activate a system profile. For example, this
command activates the system profile with the name xyz. The managed system must be
powered on first before executing this command. Replace managedsysname with the
actual managed system name.
chsysstate -m managedsysname -r sysprof -n xyz -o on

7-8 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Activating an individual partition

IBM Power Systems

Partition must be in the Not Activated state.

Managed
systems

List of
LPARs

HMC command:
chsysstate -m MSname -r lpar -o on -n lparname -f profile

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-5. Activating an individual partition AN113.0

Notes:
Activating a partition
To activate a partition using a profile, select the partition and choose Operations >
Activate > Profile on the menu. Another dialog box will open which is shown in an
upcoming visual.
HMC commands for activating a partition
The HMC command to activate a partition is shown below. Use the actual managed system
name for MSname, the actual partitions name for lparname and the actual partition profile
name for profile.
chsysstate -m MSname -r lpar -o on -n lparname -f profile
Another useful option to chsysstate is the -b bootmode. Valid bootmode values are norm
for normal, dd for diagnostic with default boot list, ds for diagnostic with stored boot list, of
for Open Firmware OK prompt, or sms for System Management Services.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 7. Partition operations 7-9

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Partition operating states

Not Activated: The partition is ready to be activated.
Running: The partition has finished its boot routines. The operating system might be
performing its own boot routines or is in its normal running state.
Not Available: This partition is not available for use. Logical partitions will be listed as
Not Available if the system is powered off.
Shutting Down: The partition has been issued the Partition Shut Down command and
is in the process of shutting down.
Open Firmware: The partition has been activated and started with the open firmware
boot option.
Error: The last attempt to activate the partition failed. Fix the activation issue and use
the Activate menu option to activate the partition.

7-10 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Activating with open terminal window

IBM Power Systems

Select the profile name and (optionally) select the terminal

window checkbox.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-6. Activating with open terminal window AN113.0

Notes:
Activating a partition
The dialog box shown in the visual above pops up after you select a partition profile and
choose Activate on the menu. It verifies the correct partition name and has the profile
already selected. You can choose whether to open the virtual terminal (console) window as
part of the activation process.
On this dialog box, check to make sure the correct profile name is selected and choose
whether you want to open a console window when the partition starts. If you do, check the
checkbox and then click OK. No errors will occur if you do not open a terminal window and
you can open a terminal window later after the partition is already running.
If there is a virtual console window already open for this partition, do not click the checkbox
and it will use the same open window. The window might still be open because you just
used it to shutdown the operating system.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 7. Partition operations 7-11

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Terminal window: Normal boot

IBM Power Systems

LPAR name
Change font and managed
and text size system name.
Copy and
with Font
paste from
menu.
Edit menu.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-7. Terminal window: Normal boot AN113.0

Notes:
This visual shows an example terminal window to a partition running the AIX V7.1
operating system.

7-12 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Activating with advanced options

IBM Power Systems

Click Advanced to choose override options.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-8. Activating with advanced options AN113.0

Notes:
Advanced options
This is the box that pops up if you click the Advanced button shown in the previous visual.
You can use this feature to override the keylock position (manual or normal) and boot mode
settings in the partition profile configuration.
The list seen in the Boot mode drop down varies depending on the operating system
environment the partition is configured to use (AIX/Linux, IBM i, or Virtual I/O Server). The
keylock position only has significance for IBM i.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 7. Partition operations 7-13

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Open or close a terminal window

IBM Power Systems

You can also open (or close) the terminal window when a
partition is already running.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-9. Open or close a terminal window AN113.0

Notes:
Virtual console windows from the HMC GUI
You can open an LPARs console from the HMC GUI or from the HMC command line. Only
one console can be open to an LPAR at a time. Select an LPAR and run the Console
Window > Open Terminal Window task.
There are two ways to close a virtual terminal:
The preferred, usual method of closing a terminal window on a Windows PC is to simply
close the window. This closes the connection.
You might need to force a virtual terminal window to close by selecting the partition and
running the Console Window > Close Terminal Connection task. Use this procedure
when the virtual terminal window is open on another HMC (or remotely from a browser)
and you want to close that session.

7-14 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty HMC commands to open and close a terminal session

You can open a virtual terminal session to a partition after it is activated, with the following
HMC command:
mkvterm -m managedsysname -p partitionname
Alternatively, you can use the partition ID instead of the partition name as shown in the
following example.
You can also use the HMC vtmenu command which provides a convenient menu of the
partitions on the managed system. Simply select the partition from the menu to open its
console window.
To close the session, exit out of the shell and type ~. (tilde dot) at the login prompt and
answer y (yes) to terminate the session.
Here is an example mkvterm command and session where managedsysname is the
actual managed system name and lparID is the actual partition ID number.
mkvterm m managedsysname --id lparID
AIX Version 7
Console login: ~.
Terminate session? [y/n]
Use the rmvterm command to close a different virtual terminal session (that is perhaps on
the HMC or another remote workstation):
rmvterm -m managedsysname -p partitionname

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 7. Partition operations 7-15

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Stopping a partition
IBM Power Systems

Two ways to stop a partition cleanly:

Log in to the operating system and use the proper shut down
command.
Use the HMC. Either use the Operation menu and then select Shut
Down or by use the chsysstate command.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-10. Stopping a partition AN113.0

Notes:
Stopping a partition
When you shut down the operating system in the partition, this stops the partition. The
partition state returns to the Not Activated state.
You can shut down a partition by logging in and executing the appropriate operating system
shut down command. You can also use the Shut Down menu option as shown in the visual
above.
Automatic Power Off
There is a setting in the managed system properties which will power off the managed
system if you stop the last partition on the system. By default, this is not enabled.
HMC command
You can also use the chsysstate HMC command to shut down the operating system:
chsysstate -m managedsysname -o shutdown -r lpar -n lparname --immed

7-16 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Partition shutdown options

IBM Power Systems

Shut down the logical

partition as quickly as
possible, without
notifying the logical
partitions.

Network connection
between LPAR and HMC
needed for OS options.
AIX shutdown command
is run in the LPAR.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-11. Partition shutdown options AN113.0

Notes:
Choose from the following shutdown options:
Delayed: The HMC shuts down the logical partition using the delayed power-off
sequence. This allows the logical partition time to end jobs and write data to disks. If the
logical partition is unable to shut down within the predetermined amount of time, it will
end abnormally and the next restart might be longer than normal.
Immediate: The HMC shuts down the logical partition immediately. The HMC ends all
active jobs immediately. The programs running in those jobs are not allowed to perform
any job cleanup. This option might cause undesirable results if data has been partially
updated. Use this option only after a controlled shutdown has been unsuccessfully
attempted.
Operating System: The HMC shuts down the logical partition normally by issuing a
shutdown command to the logical partition. During this operation, the logical partition
performs any necessary shutdown activities. This option is only available for AIX logical
partitions.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 7. Partition operations 7-17

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Operating System Immediate: The HMC shuts down the logical partition immediately
by issuing a shutdown -F command to the logical partition. During this operation, the
logical partition bypasses messages to other users and other shutdown activities. This
option is only available for AIX logical partitions.

7-18 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Create a system profile (1 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

System profile is a list of partitions and profiles used to activate

partitions or validate resource allocations to avoid contention.
To create a system profile:
Select the managed system name in the server table view.
Choose Configuration -> Manage System Profiles from the menu.
Then from the Actions menu, choose New.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-12. Create a system profile (1 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
System profiles
Recall that a system profile is a named set of partition profiles. When you activate a system
profile, all of the partition profiles that belong to it are activated. The intent of a system
profile is that it allows you to activate your entire system at once rather than having to
manually activate each partition. System profiles might be named after the types of system
loads (such as normal or high performance) or the name might refer to a time period (such
as weekday or end-of-month).
Create a system profile
To create a system profile, select the managed system name or the System Profiles folder
name, right-click, and choose Configuration > Manage System Profiles on the menu.
From the Actions menu, choose New. A dialog box will pop up that will allow you to select
the partition profiles that should belong to this system profile. This dialog box is shown in
the next visual.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 7. Partition operations 7-19

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Create a system profile (2 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

Select
Select partition
partition profile
profile
names
names onon the
the left
left and
and
click Add >>.
click Add >>.
Order
Order of
of LPARs
LPARs matters
matters
in
in a system profile.
a system profile.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-13. Create a system profile (2 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
System profiles
The system profile name must be unique for all system profiles on the managed system.
To add a partition and its profile, click the expand icons in the first panel to expand the
output. Select partition profiles on the left and use the Add>> button to add the profiles to
the system profile list. To remove partition profiles from the list, select the partition and
profile names on the right and use the <<Remove button.
The order of the partition profiles is important as it is the order the partitions are activated
when the system profile is activated. To reorder the list of partition profiles, remove the
profiles that are out of order and add them again in the correct order.
To modify or delete a system profile, go to the LPAR table view and run the Configuration
> Manage System Profiles task. Choose Modify or Delete on the Actions menu.

7-20 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Validate allocations with a system profile

IBM Power Systems

From the manage system profiles task, select the system profile and
use the Validate option on the Actions menu.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-14. Validate allocations with a system profile AN113.0

Notes:
Validate system profile
After you create a system profile, select its name and choose Validate on the menu to see
if there are any resource conflicts between the partitions. The validate function will list all
conflicts in detail.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 7. Partition operations 7-21

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Change the default partition profile

IBM Power Systems

First profile created for a partition is the default.

Cannot delete a default profile, but you can change the
default profile:
Select partition and choose Change Default Profile.
Configuration > Manage Profiles

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-15. Change the default partition profile AN113.0

Notes:
Default profile
When you activate a partition and do not specify a profile name, the system highlights the
default profile name by default. Every partition must have one default partition profile. You
cannot delete the default partition profile unless you first designate another profile as the
default profile for that partition.
Change the default partition profile
The first partition profile you create for a partition will initially be its default partition profile.
To change the default partition profile, select the partition name and choose Change
Default Profile from the tasks list. A dialog box will appear with the list of partition profile
names. Choose the partition profile you want as the new default profile for this partition.

7-22 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Managing partition profiles

IBM Power Systems

Operations with partition profiles from the Configuration >

Manage Profiles task:
Create additional profiles, edit existing profiles, copy profiles (within
one partition), delete, and activate.
Cannot delete the last activated profile if the partition is still running.
Actions menu

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-16. Managing partition profiles AN113.0

Notes:
Operations to managing partition profiles:
Backup: Reads the profile data and writes it to a backup file on the HMC.
Restore: Reads the profile data from the previously backed-up file on the HMC and
loads this data to the NVRAM on the managed system.
Initialize: Initializes the profile data on the HMC and the NVRAM on the managed
system.
Remove: Removes the previously backed-up file on the HMC.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 7. Partition operations 7-23

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Save configuration in a partition profile

IBM Power Systems

Create a new profile based on the current configuration of a

running partition.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-17. Save configuration in a partition profile AN113.0

Notes:
Saving the current configuration
Over time, you might make dynamic changes to a running partition. When you make
dynamic changes, the partition profile does not automatically get updated. You would need
to manually alter the existing partition profile if you want the change to be part of the profile
in preparation for the next time the partition is activated. Another way to do this is to save a
new profile based on the current running configuration. Use the Save Current Configuration
task to do this. After running the task, a popup window will ask for a new profile name.

7-24 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Delete a partition
IBM Power Systems

Delete a partition:
Deletes all of its partition profiles.
Partition cannot be running.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-18. Delete a partition AN113.0

Notes:
Things to remember when deleting partitions
Deleting a partition deletes all of its partition profiles.
You cannot delete an active partition.
To delete a partition, the managed system must be powered on.
The partition is also deleted from all system profiles automatically.
Delete a partition
Select the partition name and choose Operations > Delete from the tasks menu.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 7. Partition operations 7-25

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Backing up partition profile data

IBM Power Systems

Backup partition profile data:

Backs up partition and system profile configuration data.
Creates a backup file on the HMC hard disk drive.
You are prompted for a backup file name.
LPAR information kept by LPAR ID number (not name).

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-19. Backing up partition profile data AN113.0

Notes:
Partition data backup files on the HMCs
The Configuration > Managed Partition Data > Backup task will create a backup file on
the HMCs hard disk drive of all the partitions profile information and the system profile
information. The data is saved as a file on the HMC in the /var/hsc/profiles/SN directory
where SN is the serial number of the managed system.
The HMC automatically saves profile information in a backup file called backupFile. You
will see this file if you choose the Restore option. This backupFile is updated each time
you make a profile configuration change and is useful only for holding the most up-to-date
configuration.
Initialize:
This option removes all partitions and profiles! (You will wish you had a backup file if you
ever accidently choose this task.)

7-26 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Restoring partition profile data

IBM Power Systems

Restore partition profile data:

Priority is used when there is an LPAR ID that is identical on the
server and in the backup file.

Backup
files

Full only
available if all
partitions are
Not Activated

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-20. Restoring partition profile data AN113.0

Notes:
Restore options
A Full restore restores all profile data from the backup file. Profile modifications performed
after the selected backup file was created will be lost. This restore option will not work if
any partitions are running.
Backup priority and managed system priority: These two options both merge the
backup data with the recent profile activity on the HMC. In this way, if you accidently
remove a partition, a partition profile, or a system profile, you can restore the information
from your latest backup file. Partitions might be running when you perform this restore. For
example, if you delete a partitions profile and want to restore it, you can perform a restore
while the partition is still running. With both of these options, you cannot choose what you
want to restore; all changes that are different will be restored (except for partition profiles
which are currently being used).
The priorities tell the HMC which copy of data has priority when the list of partitions is the
same: the backup copy or the current HMC version (for the managed system).

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 7. Partition operations 7-27

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Managing backup files

IBM Power Systems

Delete backup files that you no longer need:

Select the managed system name, choose Configuration > Manage
Partition Data > Delete.
Select file name and click OK.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-21. Managing backup files AN113.0

Notes:
Deleting backup files
Periodically you should prune the list of backup files. In fact, just like other computer
systems, you should create a backup policy. For example, this policy might be to perform a
weekly backup, keep backup files for 4 weeks, and after each backup is successful, the
oldest backup file is removed. Or, you might want to just backup the profile data every time
a change is made. The problem with this policy is that you might be in a hurry and forget
this crucial step.
These backup files are fairly small and the HMC hard disk drive is adequate to hold many
backup files. However, you still might want to remove backup files after awhile.

7-28 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Backup and restore from the HMC CLI

IBM Power Systems

Backup and restores of profile data can be done from the HMC CLI.
Media can be the HMC hard drive, a USB flash drive, writeable DVD, USB diskette drive,
or internal diskette drive (if available).
Listing backup files from HMC CLI:
ls -l /var/hsc/profiles/105*
total 900
-rw-rw-r-- 1 ccfw ccfw 225280 2011-02-18 11:31 backupFile
drwxrwxr-x 2 ccfw ccfw 4096 2011-02-18 11:39 directory
-rw-rw-r-- 1 ccfw ccfw 225280 2011-02-18 11:21 New332withLPAR3
-rw-rw-r-- 1 ccfw ccfw 225280 2011-02-18 11:38 Test

Backup profile data:

List out /media directory to see available devices.
Example backup command:
bkprofdata -m <msname> -f /media/cdrom/Mybackup

Restore profile data example:

rstprofdata -m <msname> -l # -f /media/cdrom/Mybackup

1=full, 2=backup priority,

3=managed system priority, 4=initialize
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-22. Backup and restore from the HMC CLI AN113.0

Notes:
Backup and restore from the HMC command line
In the bkprofdata command, if no directory is specified in -f argument, the file is created
in /var/hsc/profiles/SN#/* where SN# is the serial number of the server.
List out the /media directory to see the available mount points:
hscroot@hmc> ls /media
cdrom floppy
For USB devices, plug them in first, then list out the /media directory.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 7. Partition operations 7-29

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Scheduling operations (1 of 4)
IBM Power Systems

Operations can be scheduled based on date and time:

Once or recurring

From Schedule Operations task, use Options > New menu

item to create a new scheduled operation.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-23. Scheduling operations (1 of 4) AN113.0

Notes:
Scheduling operations
There are different types of operations that can be scheduled depending on the type of
object that is selected first. For example, if you select the server, then operations such as
server power on or off operations can be scheduled, a system profile can be activated, or
partition data can be backed up. For a partition, operations such as activation, DLPAR
operations, and shutdown can be scheduled. In addition, you can schedule operations
specific to the HMC if you access the Schedule Operations task from the HMC
Management application.

7-30 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Scheduling operations (2 of 4)
IBM Power Systems

Available operations for an LPAR:

Specify date and time:

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-24. Scheduling operations (2 of 4) AN113.0

Notes:
Add a scheduled operation
Once you choose Options > New from the menu, a window will pop up with a list of
available operations. Choose one and click OK.
Date and Time tab
Set up the date and time of the operation. If the operation cannot be performed at that
exact date and time, then the time window will be used to determine if the operation should
be performed or cancelled. For example, if the operation was supposed to happen at 1:00
AM and the partition was in the middle of a restart, and the time window was set to 30
minutes, then the operation can start if the partition is ready by 1:30 AM.
Notice the three tabs in the visual above. If the operation needs to repeat, click the Repeat
tab to configure a repeated scheduled operation. The Options tab is where you specify any
specifics for the operation.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 7. Partition operations 7-31

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Scheduling operations (3 of 4)
IBM Power Systems

Recurring operations:

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-25. Scheduling operations (3 of 4) AN113.0

Notes:
Repeat tab
The Repeat tab is used to configure repeating scheduled operations. For example, you
might want to move 2.0 processing units from one partition to another at midnight every
night and then move them back at 7AM. Click the Set up a repeated scheduled
operation, then specify the days of the week and the other options.
The Interval field is a required field and the maximum is 26 weeks. This is the number of
weeks to elapse before performing the scheduled operation again on each selected day.
For example, if you want the operation to happen every other week, enter a 2 for the
number of weeks in the Interval field.
The Repetitions field is also a required field and the maximum is 100 or you have the
choice of checking the Repeat indefinitely box.

7-32 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Scheduling operations (4 of 4)
IBM Power Systems

Specifics for operation:

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-26. Scheduling operations (4 of 4) AN113.0

Notes:
Options tab
The Options tab will change depending on the operation being configured. The example in
the visual above is a dynamic reconfiguration operation so it asks for specific resource and
destination information for that operation.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 7. Partition operations 7-33

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Troubleshooting activation failures (1 of 3)

IBM Power Systems

Partition activation failures are typically the result of not

enough resources to meet the minimum or required settings.
Read the error message, check your documentation and the
managed system properties to figure out why.
Keep your worksheets up to date!

Example Failure Only first conflict is shown

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-27. Troubleshooting activation failures (1 of 3) AN113.0

Notes:
Typical failures
If there is a partition activation failure, it is probably because you attempted to start more
resources than you have available. Assuming that you did not make a calculation error
when figuring how many processors or how much memory to configure, there must be
another reason for the error.
Managed system properties
You can select the name of the managed system in the server table view and choose
Properties to see what resources are allocated to which partitions.

7-34 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Troubleshooting activation failures (2 of 3)

IBM Power Systems

Not enough processor or memory resources to meet

minimum requirement:
A partition will attempt to allocate up to its desired amount:
Desired amounts for partitions too high?
Partition activation order might be a factor.
Maximum memory might be set too high so that memory for page
tables is over-configured.
Do not forget to plan for hypervisor memory needs.
Leave a little extra free memory especially if you expect to create more
virtual adapters or use more IVE logical Ethernet ports.
I/O slot in required list is not available:
Is it configured in a running partition?
Cannot find boot device:
This is technically not an activation failure, but it still prevents the
operating system from booting.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-28. Troubleshooting activation failures (2 of 3) AN113.0

Notes:
Activation errors
Check your documentation and the managed system properties to figure out why you are
attempting to allocate more processors or memory than the managed system has. Perhaps
the partitions that started or their profiles were not the ones you expected or when the
partitions started they came up in a different order, and all of the partitions with high desired
numbers for processors grabbed too many of them.
Cannot find boot device
Technically, by the time the partition discovers it cannot find its boot device, it has already
activated successfully. However, this scenario is included here because it is another
common reason that a partition cannot fully start up. If you activate partitions with an open
terminal window, you will be able to monitor the partition starting up. The partition will stop
and display error information in the terminal window. From the HMC, it looks like the
partition has activated normally (which, technically it has).

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 7. Partition operations 7-35

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Troubleshooting activation failures (3 of 3)

IBM Power Systems

Actions to take:
Read any error messages.
Use managed system properties or HMC commands to check system
resources.
Use the System Profile Validate menu option to discover
discrepancies.
Use DLPAR to free up additional resources.
Reduce minimum setting for partition you are trying to activate.
Reconfigure partition profiles and update documentation (so this does
not happen next time).

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-29. Troubleshooting activation failures (3 of 3) AN113.0

Notes:
Use the Validate option for the system profile
One technique you can use to avoid activation failures related to over-configuration is to
create a system profile with a list of all of the partitions and their profiles that you want to
run simultaneously. Select the system profile name and use the Validate menu option. This
will report any discrepancies in resource allocations.

7-36 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Checkpoint (1 of 2)
IBM Power Systems

1. How can you stop a partition?

2. What states must the managed system be in to create

partitions?

3. True or False: The last partition profile you create for a

partition is automatically its default profile.

4. When you modify a partition profile's configuration, what

must you do to apply the new configuration to an active
partition?

5. True or False: If you delete a partition, you delete all of its

partition profiles.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-30. Checkpoint (1 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 7. Partition operations 7-37

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Checkpoint (2 of 2)
IBM Power Systems

6. List two things you can do if a partition will not activate.

7. Match the partition states to their definitions.

States: Not activated, shutting down, running, not available
a. __________The partition is in the process of stopping.
b. __________The partition has been successfully activated.
c. __________The partition is not running but is available to be activated.
d. __________The system is in a state that prevents the partition from being
activated (such as the managed system is powered off).

8. True or False: When activating a partition, you must use the Open
Terminal Window option.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-31. Checkpoint (2 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:

7-38 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Exercise: Partition operations

IBM Power Systems

Unit
exerc
ise

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-32. Exercise: Partition operations AN113.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 7. Partition operations 7-39

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Unit summary
IBM Power Systems

Having completed this unit, you should be able to:

Activate and shut down partitions
Modify, copy, and delete partition profiles
Create, modify, delete, and activate system profiles
Open and close terminal windows
Change partition availability priority
Back up and restore partition profile data
Troubleshoot partition activation errors

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 7-33. Unit summary AN113.0

Notes:
More summary information:
Activation options for partitions
- Manually, system profile, automated, HMC chsysstate command
Partition states
- Not Activated, Starting, Running, Error, Not Available
Partition profiles can be modified, copied, deleted, backed up, restored, and initialized
- Change default profiles
System profiles
- Are lists of partitions and a selected profile
- Can be used during power on or after the managed system is operating
Partition console windows
- Can be opened or closed, and accessed from HMC command line
Partition activation errors are usually caused by an attempt to use resources that are
already in use

7-40 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure

What this unit is about

This unit describes the procedures for performing dynamic resource
allocations on partitions. Also covered is the DLPAR troubleshooting.

What you should be able to do

After completing this unit, you should be able to:
List the system requirements for dynamic logical partitioning
(DLPAR)
Dynamically remove, add, and move processors, memory, and I/O
slots to and from partitions
Perform operating system operations necessary to dynamically
add and remove I/O slots
Use HMC commands to perform DLPAR operations and list
hardware resources
Schedule DLPAR operations
Reinitialize RMC configuration
Troubleshoot DLPAR operation errors

How you will check your progress

Accountability:
Checkpoint questions
Machine exercises

References
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/systems/index.jsp
IBM System p and AIX Information Center
SG24-7940 PowerVM virtualization on IBM system p: Introduction
and Configuration
SG24-6615 A Practical Guide for Resource Monitoring and Control
(RMC)

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure 8-1
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Unit objectives
IBM Power Systems

After completing this unit, you should be able to:

List the system requirements for dynamic logical partitioning
(DLPAR)
Dynamically remove, add, and move processors, memory,
and I/O slots to and from partitions
Perform operating system operations necessary to
dynamically add and remove I/O slots
Use HMC commands to perform DLPAR operations and list
hardware resources
Schedule DLPAR operations
Reinitialize RMC configuration
Troubleshoot DLPAR operation errors

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-1. Unit objectives AN113.0

Notes:
In this unit, we will look at both performing partition dynamic resource allocation and
troubleshooting potential problems.

8-2 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Dynamic logical partitioning

IBM Power Systems

Dynamic logical partitioning (DLPAR) is the ability to add, remove, and

move resources without reactivation of a partition:
Processor, memory, and I/O allocation changes.
Includes virtual adapters and IVE logical ports.
Dynamic CUoD (processors and memory).
Operating system support:
AIX V5.2 and up support all DLPAR operations.
RHEL for POWER V3 does not support DLPAR.
SLES 9 and up, and RHEL for POWER V4 and up support processor and I/O
slot DLPAR.
Applications might or might not be DLPAR-aware.
Network connection between the HMC and the partition must be
available.
DLPAR operations can be done manually from the HMC or can be
scheduled at a certain date and time.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-2. Dynamic logical partitioning AN113.0

Notes:
Dynamic Logical Partitioning
Dynamic means that we can add, move, or remove resources without having to reactivate
the partition. So if there are partitions that need more or can do with fewer resources, you
can dynamically move the resources between partitions within the managed system
without shutting down the partitions. Both the source and the destination partitions must
support the dynamic partitioning operation.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure 8-3
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

DLPAR operations overview

IBM Power Systems

Processors and memory:

Quantities are bound by the maximum and minimum partition profile
settings.
Can change virtual processor and uncapped/capped settings.
CUoD processors and memory can be added dynamically.
I/O slots:
Required slots cannot be dynamically removed.
Can change the required setting dynamically by modifying the active profile.
Can add or remove virtual I/O adapters and IVE logical ports.
Dynamic operations do not change the profiles:
Update the partition profile to make changes permanent.
Auto start power on option uses a partitions last configuration, not a
partition profile configuration.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-3. DLPAR operations overview AN113.0

Notes:
DLPAR and resource configurations
Recall that there is a maximum and a minimum configuration option for processors and
memory. You cannot exceed these boundaries when performing dynamic reallocation
operations. For example, you can continue to remove processors from an active partition
until the total number of processors in use is equal to the minimum amount. The limits in
use are those in the active partition profile.
For I/O slots, you cannot remove any slot that is required in the active partition profile. You
also cannot remove any slot that contains an adapter that connects to a device that is in
use.
If an I/O slot is on the required list, it cannot be dynamically removed from the partition. The
slot can be moved from the required list to the desired list in the active partition profile and
then it can be dynamically removed.

8-4 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

How DLPAR works

IBM Power Systems
1
HMC
HMC command
2

3 3

Partition A Partition B

Hypervisor 4
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-4. How DLPAR works AN113.0

Notes:
The visual above illustrates how a dynamic move operation works.
1. The DLPAR request originates at the HMC.
2. The request is made over the network to the POWER Hypervisor.
3. Partition A and Partition B communicate with the HMC about the DLPAR operation
through a process running on both partitions.
4. The POWER Hypervisor makes the resource allocation change.
As you can see in the visual above, DLPAR operations are dependent on a functioning
network between the HMC and the managed system, and between the HMC and the
partitions. If the network is down either between the HMC and the managed system or
between the partitions and the HMC, or if there are problems with routing, then DLPAR
operations cannot occur.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure 8-5
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

DLPAR operations
IBM Power Systems

Select the partition, then choose the type of resource

and operation.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-5. DLPAR operations AN113.0

Notes:
Dynamic Logical Partitioning menu option
The visual on this page shows how to begin a dynamic reallocation operation. Select the
running partition and access the Dynamic Logical Partitioning menu where you can pick
the type of resource and the operation to perform.
Which partition you initially select will depend on the dynamic operation that you want to
perform. For an add operation, choose the destination partition. For remove and move
operations, select the source partition.

8-6 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Dedicated processor operation

IBM Power Systems

Add or remove operation:

Enter final desired amount.

What is
available?

Is it a valid
operation?
Enter
amount

How long are

you willing to
wait?

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-6. Dedicated processor operation AN113.0

Notes:
Adding processors
In the visual above, the Available system processors: 0 line tells us that the managed
system has no free processors so an add operation is impossible. You can add up to the
maximum processors for the partition specified in the active partition profile. Note that the
screen in the visual above tells you what this number is. Look at the Maximum column.
Moving or removing processors
When you move or remove processors, you initially select the source partition and then
start the dynamic reallocation operation. You indicate the destination partition for a move
operation in the pop-up window. You can remove processors down to the minimum setting
for processors in the active partition profile.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure 8-7
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Shared processing units operation

IBM Power Systems

What's
Is it a valid available?
operation?
Enter
quantities

Capped/
uncapped
and weight

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-7. Shared processing units operation AN113.0

Notes:
Share processor options
You can alter the processing units, the uncapped/capped status, the uncapped weight
value, and the virtual processor quantity from this screen.
Timeout setting
This is the amount of time that the HMC has to complete this operation. If it does not
complete the operation within this amount of time, the operation will fail. The timeout setting
by default is 5 which means that the HMC will wait 5 minutes for a DLPAR operation to
finish.

8-8 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Move memory operation

IBM Power Systems

Is it a valid
operation?
Enter quantity
to move
Move to which
partition?
Is it a valid
operation?

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-8. Move memory operation AN113.0

Notes:
Moving memory
In the example shown in the visual above, 256 MB of memory is being moved from the
LPAR3 partition (shown in the window title) to the LPAR2 partition.
The smallest unit that can be moved is the LMB size for the system.
Moving processors works the same way
If this were the screen to move processors, similar information would be shown. You would
see the maximum and minimum settings for processing units (or dedicated processors)
and virtual processors, and you would need to specify the destination partition.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure 8-9
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Add I/O slots operation

IBM Power Systems

Select the adapter(s).

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-9. Add I/O slots operation AN113.0

Notes:
Dynamically adding I/O slots
The visual above shows an example of adding a free I/O slot to a running partition. You get
to this window by selecting the partition name, then choosing from the menu: Dynamic
Logical Partitioning, Physical Adapter Resources, and Add. A free I/O slot is one that
does not belong to another running partition. Only slots that are currently not assigned to
other running partitions will appear in this list.
Simply select the I/O slots you want, then click the OK button.

8-10 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

AIX commands for I/O operations

IBM Power Systems

After adding slots with adapters from the HMC:

Must run cfgmgr in the AIX destination partition for it to discover the newly added
devices.
Use lsdev C in AIX to list devices.

When removing I/O slots:

Use rmdev to remove the devices from the source partition.
Cannot remove:
Slots that are listed as required in the active partition profile.
Slots with devices that have not been removed in AIX.
Can change the required designation to desired in the active profile.

When moving I/O slots, it is really a remove operation followed

by an add operation:
Do not forget to run rmdev in source partition and cfgmgr in destination partition.

In Linux, devices are automatically configured when added, and

automatically deconfigured when removed.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-10. AIX commands for I/O operations AN113.0

Notes:
Removing I/O devices
First log in to the partition and remove the devices from the partition using the rmdev
AIX command. You must remove all of the devices associated with that I/O slot in the
order of the children up to the parent.
After devices are gone, then dynamically remove the I/O slots from the partition using
the HMC.
If you are moving slots, do everything for a remove, then perform the DLPAR move
operation, and then run the cfgmgr command in the destination AIX partition.
You do not need to run commands similar to cfgmgr or rmdev in Linux because devices are
automatically configured and deconfigured by Linux kernel units.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure 8-11
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Removing I/O slots in AIX (1 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

Removing (or moving) slots:

Must rmdev l all the devices in AIX that are in use.
For PCI devices, you remove all the way up to the PCI slot device.
Use the -d option for rmdev to remove entries in ODM and prevent left over Defined
devices.

Example: Remove a CD-ROM drive on a PCI adapter:

What other devices are connected via the slot?
Might have other devices such as tape drives.
Must rmdev peer devices (tape drive, and so on), the bus, and the PCI slot
device.

PCI slot device

Remove devices
recursively, or manually
from the bottom up
Bus

CD-ROM Tape
drive drive

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-11. Removing I/O slots in AIX (1 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
If you want to move an I/O slot from one partition to another, it is probably because there is
an adapter in that slot that you want to be part of another partition. That adapter might have
devices (such as tape drives) and it might even have multiple buses. The devices such as
tape drives, the buses, and the PCI slot itself must all be removed in AIX before you can
move them to another partition using the HMC GUI or command line. The HMC software
will not move I/O slots that have devices that are in use.
You remove these devices from AIX by using the rmdev -l XXX where XXX represents the
device name. For example, rmdev -l cd0 will remove the cd0 device. The trick is figuring
out the list of devices to remove. This process is shown on the next visual.

8-12 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Removing I/O slots in AIX (2 of 2)

IBM Power Systems

First, find out which devices need to be removed:

In the LPAR, find out the devices parent, the PCI device, and the slot in use:
# lsdev -Cl cd0 -F parent
ide0
# lsslot -c slot l ide0
U787F.001.DPM166X-P1-T12 Logical I/O Slot pci2 ide0
Or, attempt the DLPAR operation and read the error which lists all of the devices that need to be
removed.
Then, remove the PCI device and all of the devices belonging it:
# rmdev -l pci2 -R
cd0 Defined
ide0 Defined
pci2 Defined

IVE logical ports:

If you are removing the second IVE logical port, simply remove the ent, en, and et devices/interfaces.
If you are removing the last IVE logical port, also remove the lhea device.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-12. Removing I/O slots in AIX (2 of 2) AN113.0

Notes:
Removing devices individually
If you want to remove the devices individually, rather than with the -R (recursive) option, be
sure to execute the commands so that you remove the devices from the bottom up. For
example:
# rmdev -l cd0
# rmdev -l ide0
# rmdev -l pci2

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure 8-13
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Remove I/O slots operation

IBM Power Systems

Select the slot(s) and click OK to remove or, choose a destination partition
to move the slot.

If this is a move
operation, select
destination partition.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-13. Remove I/O slots operation AN113.0

Notes:
Removing and moving I/O slots
The visual above shows the HMC Dynamic Logical Partitioning > Physical Adapter >
Move or Remove task. The window shows you the slots that are available to be removed.
Slots that can be moved or removed are those that are not listed as required in the partition
profile, or slots that have been added from a previous dynamic add operation.
The previous couple of visuals illustrated how you would remove the necessary devices
from the operating system. Now that the proper devices have been removed in AIX, you
can remove the I/O slot using the HMC application. Beware that the slots will show up in
the adapters window whether you have performed the appropriate AIX rmdev operations.

8-14 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

DLPAR status (1 of 4)
IBM Power Systems

When the DLPAR operation is successful, the window disappears and

you will see any new information reflected in the LPAR table view.

If the operation takes some time, you might see a working window.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-14. DLPAR status (1 of 4) AN113.0

Notes:
Working window
This visual shows the result of a dynamic reallocation operation. You can see the new
resource amount in the LPAR table view. Sometimes you will see a Working window if the
operation takes some time to complete. If you do not see a failure message, then the
operation was a success.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure 8-15
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

DLPAR status (2 of 4)
IBM Power Systems

When the DLPAR operation is not successful, the error might

appear in the operation window.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-15. DLPAR status (2 of 4) AN113.0

Notes:
This visual shows one example of what might happen when a dynamic operation fails. The
error should be descriptive so you can fix the problem, and try the operation again.
Example error
The example error in the visual above shows what will happen if you attempt to allocate a
quantity of processing resources for the assigned value that is higher than the maximum
value.

8-16 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

DLPAR status (3 of 4)
IBM Power Systems

Or, the error might appear in a pop up window:

Trying to allocate more resources than are available:

Increasing processing units without also increasing virtual processors:

Minimum VP setting is the next higher whole number as compared to
processing units quantity.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-16. DLPAR status (3 of 4) AN113.0

Notes:
DLPAR error example
The visual above shows two errors that you might see in pop-up windows.
The first error in the visual above says you are trying to add more resources than are
available on the system.
The second error says that you tried to add processing units in a quantity higher than the
number of virtual processors allows. The minimum virtual processor quantity is the next
higher whole number in relation to the processing units number.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure 8-17
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

DLPAR status (4 of 4)
IBM Power Systems

DLPAR errors might be the result of networking or daemon

errors.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-17. DLPAR status (4 of 4) AN113.0

Notes:
Networking errors
Recall that partitions must have a network connection to their HMC to perform DLPAR
operations. A simple ping should tell you if this is the issue. The error shown above could
be a network error or a problem with the RMC daemons. The problem could be on the
LPAR, on the HMC, or somewhere in between.
RMC errors
If a ping works between the LPAR and its HMC, then check the RMC daemons that are
necessary for DLPAR operations. The next page discusses how to view the daemons and
restart them if necessary.

8-18 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

DLPAR troubleshooting
IBM Power Systems

If the DLPAR operation fails, check:

The network connection between the LPAR and the HMC.
Use the ping command or the HMC's Test Network Connectivity task.
Check the required daemons:
On the LPAR, check to see IBM.DRM is listed:
lssrc -a | grep IBM.DRM
To refresh the RMC daemons in the LPAR, first do a clean stop:
To stop the daemons (LPAR).
/usr/sbin/rsct/bin/rmcctrl z
To start the daemons (LPAR) and enable remote client communications:
/usr/sbin/rsct/bin/rmcctrl A
/usr/sbin/rsct/bin/rmcctrl p
On the HMC, check that the services are listed, and if not, reboot the
HMC:
monhmc -s rmc
hmcshutdown t now r
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-18. DLPAR troubleshooting AN113.0

Notes:
Troubleshooting
First, check the network connection between the LPAR and its HMC. Can they ping back
and forth?
Next, check the RMC daemons. These are rarely the cause of DLPAR issues, but it can
happen. The visual above shows how to restart the RMC daemons on the LPAR. To restart
the RMC daemons on the HMC, reboot it.
The IBM.DRM daemon is the resource manager needed for DLPAR operations.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure 8-19
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

List resources with lshwres command

IBM Power Systems

List hardware resource (lshwres) command:

lshwres -r {resource} -m MSname -level type \
F attr1,attr2 -header

Examples for a managed system named lou:

List memory information:
lshwres -r mem -m lou -level lpar
List processor information:
lshwres -r proc -m lou -level lpar
List IO slot information:
lshwres -r io m lou -rsubtype slot
List only desired attributes:
lshwres -r proc m lou \
F lpar_name,curr_proc_units --header

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-19. List resources with lshwres command AN113.0

Notes:
Using the lshwres HMC command
You can use the lshwres command to view results of dynamic partition operations or to
view current configurations before running chhwres commands.
Heres an example of the lshwres command to find out the DRC index for a specific I/O
slot. In this example, on the managed system named max, the DRC index for the C5 slot
that contains an Fibre Channel adapter is 21010205:
hscroot@hmc> lshwres -r io -m max --rsubtype slot|grep C5
unit_phys_loc=U78AA.001.WZSG3GX,bus_id=517,phys_loc=C5,drc_index=21010205,
lpar_id=none,slot_io_pool_id=none,description=Fibre Channel Serial
Bus,feature_codes=none,pci_vendor_id=10DF,pci_device_id=F100,pci_subs_vendo
r_id=1014,pci_subs_device_id=038A,pci_class=0C04,pci_revision_id=03,bus_gro
uping=0,iop=0,parent_slot_drc_index=none,drc_name=U78AA.001.WZSG3GX-P1-C5

8-20 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

chhwres HMC command for DLPAR

IBM Power Systems

Change hardware resource (chhwres) command:

chhwres -r {resource} -o {a|r|m} -t "T-LPAR" \
-p "S-LPAR -m MSname -q {#} -w {#}

Examples for a managed system named lou:

Add 16 MB unit of memory:
chhwres -r mem -o a -p LPAR1 -m lou -q 16 -w 0

Move 1 processor from LPAR1 to LPAR2:

chhwres -r proc -o m -p LPAR1 -t LPAR2 \
-m lou -q 1 -w 0

Addition of I/O slot:

chhwres -r io -rsubtype slot -o a -p LPAR1 \
-m lou l 21030003 -w 0
DRCindex
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-20. chhwres HMC command for DLPAR AN113.0

Notes:
You can use the chhwres command to perform dynamic partition operations. The visual
above shows a subset of the options available for this command. For more information on
the command options, log in to the HMC via SSH and use the man chhwres or chhwres
--help commands.
I/O slot operations and the DRC index
To specify an exact I/O slot, you use the dynamic reconfiguration connector (DRC) index
for a particular slot. Use the lshwres HMC command to find out what the DRC index is for
a slot. The DRC index is not a static address and might change if the physical I/O hardware
is reconfigured so always check the address first with lshwres before issuing a chhwres for
dynamic I/O slot operations.

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure 8-21
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Checkpoint
IBM Power Systems

1. The upper and lower limits for dynamically adding and removing
memory are bound by what two partition configuration settings?

2. True or False: Dynamically reallocating resources on a partition

does not alter the contents of the active partition profile.

3. If a partitions processor or memory resource is already at its

maximum setting and you need to add more, what do you need
to do?

4. What dynamic reconfiguration operations can be scheduled on

the HMC?

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-21. Checkpoint AN113.0

Notes:

8-22 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

Uempty

Exercise: Dynamic resource allocation

IBM Power Systems

Unit
exerc
ise

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-22. Exercise: Dynamic resource allocation AN113.0

Notes:

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Unit 8. Dynamic LPAR infrastructure 8-23
Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Unit summary
IBM Power Systems

Having completed this unit, you should be able to:

List the system requirements for dynamic logical partitioning
(DLPAR)
Dynamically remove, add, and move processors, memory,
and I/O slots to and from partitions
Perform operating system operations necessary to
dynamically add and remove I/O slots
Use HMC commands to perform DLPAR operations and list
hardware resources
Schedule DLPAR operations
Reinitialize RMC configuration
Troubleshoot DLPAR operation errors

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Figure 8-23. Unit summary AN113.0

Notes:
The DLPAR capabilities of the different operating systems vary.
Processors, memory, and I/O slots can be dynamically removed, added, and moved to
and from partitions.
- Quantities are bounded by minimum and maximum or desired and required settings.
- Not all of the operating systems support all of the DLPAR operations.
Additional AIX commands are necessary when dynamically adding and removing I/O
slots.
HMC commands can be used to perform DLPAR operations.
DLPAR operations can be scheduled on the HMC.
Troubleshooting DLPAR operation errors involves looking at the network configuration,
RMC configuration, and validity of the operation.

8-24 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

AP Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions

Unit 1, "Introduction to partitioning"

Solutions for Figure 1-34, "Checkpoint (1 of 3)," on page 1-47

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 3)
IBM Power Systems

1. True or False: A partition is an independent operating environment.

The answer is True.

2. What is it that makes logical partitioning different from physical

partitioning?
a. Resource assignments are flexible.
b. Resources can be moved between partitions without a restart.
c. Partitioning is not dependent on physical system building blocks.
The answer is partitioning is not dependent on physical system building
blocks.

3. Which of the following are true for dynamic partition operations?

a. All AIX partitions on POWER6 and POWER7 processor-based systems
are capable of dynamic resource allocations.
b. Virtual I/O devices can be dynamically added or removed but not moved
between partitions.
c. Partitions do not need to be restarted to add, remove, or move resources.
d. All of the above.
The answer is all of the above.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions A-1

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Solutions for Figure 1-35, "Checkpoint (2 of 3)," on page 1-48

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 3)
IBM Power Systems

4. List the types of resources that are configured in partitions.

The answer is processors, memory, and I/O slots (including the HEA).

5. What system option provides the ability to order additional

resources that can be activated when you need them?
The answer is capacity on demand (CoD).

6. Which of the following are benefits of using partitions?

a. Better management of resources across operating environments
b. Isolate applications that were all running on one system
c. Better high availability solution
d. Manage operational costs by consolidating resources
The answers are better management of resources across operating
environments, isolate applications that were all running on one
system, and manage operational costs by consolidating resources.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

A-2 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

AP Solutions for Figure 1-36, "Checkpoint (3 of 3)," on page 1-49

Checkpoint solutions (3 of 3)
IBM Power Systems

7. What is the system component that performs the resource

allocation to partitions?
The answer is the POWER Hypervisor.

8. What is the system component needed to configure partitions,

configure CoD, and provide access to virtual consoles?
The answer is the HMC, SDMC, or IVM.

9. What is the term used for the concept of allocating sub-

processors to partitions?
The answer is micro-partitioning.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions A-3

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Unit 2, "Hardware system overview"

Solutions for Figure 2-52, "Checkpoint (1 of 2)," on page 2-59

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 2)
IBM Power Systems

1. List the major components that make up an IBM Power Systems

server.
The answers are processors, memory, I/O slots, and expansion drawers.

2. What is the main difference between the Express and Enterprise

Power models?
The answer is the Enterprise servers include redundant components and
concurrent repair for higher availability and protection of the system.

3. How many cores are available on POWER7 processor chips.

The answer is the POWER7 is a multi-core processor, available with 4, 6, or 8
cores.

4. What is the TurboCore mode?

The answer is TurboCore mode is a mechanism to increase the
performance. It turns off half of the cores of the chip, thus, there are fewer
cores running with a higher core-to-L3-cache ratio (twice the L3 cache per
core available).
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

A-4 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

AP Solutions for Figure 2-53, "Checkpoint (2 of 2)," on page 2-60

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 2)
IBM Power Systems

5. List at least three functions of the flexible service processor.

The answers are it provides system initialization, connects to the HMC, runs
ASMI for setting system flags, and includes hardware error detection.

6. What is the EnergyScale technology?

The answer is the EnergyScale provides collection of real-time server energy
consumption. This data can be displayed by the IBM Systems Director Active
Energy Manager.

7. What is a location code?

The answer is the location code is a sequence of labels that, when followed
in order, lead to the location of a device.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions A-5

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Unit 3, "Hardware Management Console"

Solutions for Figure 3-90, "Topic 1: Checkpoint," on page 3-110

Topic 1: Checkpoint solutions

IBM Power Systems

1. Which of the following are functions of the HMC?

a. Monitor TCP/IP network objects
b. Capacity on demand activation
c. Partition configuration
d. Activate partitions
The answers are capacity on demand activation, partition configuration, and
activate partitions.

2. When might an HMC need to be configured as a DHCP server?

The answer is when it is on a private network and there is no other DHCP
server.

3. How is the HMC connected to its managed system?

The answer is the connection uses Ethernet.

4. True or False: One HMC can manage multiple managed systems.

The answer is True.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

A-6 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

AP Solutions for Figure 3-118, "Topic 2: Checkpoint," on page 3-143

Topic 2: Checkpoint solutions

IBM Power Systems

1. Which of the following statements about HMC users are true?

a. When you create an HMC user, it exists only on that HMC.
b. Task roles describe the procedures that users can perform.
c. You can set multiple task roles and multiple managed resource roles for a user.
d. A user with a custom task role can be created which allows the user to access only the
HMC command line and not the web browser user interface.
The answers are when you create an HMC user, it exists only on that HMC, task roles
describe the procedures that users can perform, and a user with a custom task role can be
created which allows the user to access only the HMC command line and not the web
browser user interface.

2. List HMC remote access options.

The answers are remote web connection and SSH login.

3. What must be configured to provide SSH access to the HMC command line?
The answers are open firewall, enable SSH access from HMC Management Work pane,
and install SSH on client.

4. True or False: The communication between a remote web browser and the HMC is
SSL encrypted by default.
The answer is True.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions A-7

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Solutions for Figure 3-119, "Checkpoint (1 of 2)," on page 3-144

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 2)
IBM Power Systems

1. Which of the following statements are true?

a. When you apply power to the managed system, the service processor searches
for a DHCP server for its IP address.
b. If it does not find a DHCP server, it waits for one to contact it.
c. The IP address for the service processor can be set to any valid IP address.
d. The network configuration for the service processor can be changed in the ASMI
application.
The answers are when you apply power to the managed system, the service
processor searches for a DHCP server for its IP address, the IP address for the
service processor can be set to any valid IP address, and the network
configuration for the service processor can be changed in the ASMI application.

2. True or False: An important part of setting up the managed system connection

to the HMC is to not apply power to the managed system until the HMC is
configured.
The answer is True.

3. True or False: The virtual console communications are encrypted.

The answer is True.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

A-8 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

AP Solutions for Figure 3-120, "Checkpoint (2 of 2)," on page 3-145

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 2)
IBM Power Systems

4. How do you reboot the HMC remotely?

The answer is use the Shutdown or Restart task from the HMC Management
work pane, or log in with SSH to the HMC command line and type
hmcshutdown r t now.
5. What is the difference between a user account and a task role?
The answer is a user account is used to log in. A task role is a predefined
set of access rights.
6. Besides the firewall options, what are the remote access options
that can be enabled or disabled on the HMC V7?
The answers are remote virtual console, SSH access, and remote web
connection.
7. True or False: The HMC can be used as a fully functional Linux
system.
The answer is False. The HMC allows only restricted shell access to a
reduced set of Linux commands.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions A-9

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Unit 4, "Hardware Management Console maintenance"

Solutions for Figure 4-26, "Checkpoint," on page 4-33

Checkpoint solutions
IBM Power Systems
1. Can critical console data be restored on a different HMC?
The answer is yes. Perform the installation/recovery process.
2. True or False: Performing a Backup Critical Console Data backs up all
partition configuration data.
The answer is true because it saves the profile data backup files. Even if you
do not perform any profile data backup operation, there is one automatic file
named backupFile.
3. From where is your HMC configuration information restored during the
upgrade process?
The answer is from the special area on the HMC disk (if you remembered the
Save Upgrade Data step).
4. From where is your HMC configuration data restored during the
installation/recovery process?
The answer is your Backup Critical Console Data DVD-RAM, or from a remote
system using NFS or FTP.

5. List two things that the Backup Critical Console Data option backs up.
The answers include user configuration, user-preference files, platform-
configuration files, log files, and partition profile data backup files.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

A-10 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

AP Unit 5, "System power management"

Solutions for Figure 5-13, "Checkpoint," on page 5-16

Checkpoint solutions
IBM Power Systems

1. List at least two methods of powering on the managed system.

The answers include operator panel power button, ASMI, HMC
command line, and HMC GUI application.
2. What are the different power on options for a managed system?
The answers are normal. system profile, and hardware discovery.

3. Which option powers up the system using a predefined list of partition

profiles?
The answer is the system profile option.
4. What is the difference between normal and fast power off options?
The answer is the normal option allows all active jobs to end in a
controlled manner. Fast causes jobs to end without cleanup
processing.

5. What HMC command can be used to power on or off the managed

system?
The answer is chsysstate.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions A-11

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Unit 6, "Planning and configuring logical partitions"

Solutions for Figure 6-33, "Checkpoint (1 of 2)," on page 6-39

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 2)
IBM Power Systems
1. Match the terms minimum, desired, and maximum to the proper description:
a. This is the upper limit of processors or memory that cannot be exceeded when using
dynamic operations. Maximum
b. This is the lower limit of processors or memory when using dynamic operations.
Minimum
c. This is the amount of processors or memory that a partition receives if there are more
than enough resources on the system when the partition is activated (starts). Desired
The answers are the upper limit of processors or memory that cannot be exceeded
when using dynamic operations is the maximum, the lower limit of processors or
memory when using dynamic operations is the minimum, and the amount of
processors or memory that a partition receives if there are more than enough
resources on the system when the partition is activated is the desired.
2. True or False: The amount of desired processors must always be greater than or
equal to the amount of minimum processors.
The answer is True.
3. What is the minimum amount of memory for an AIX partition?
The answer is 128 MB or, if the LMB size of the partition is 256 MB, the minimum
would be 256 MB.
4. True or False: Empty I/O slots can be allocated to partitions.
The answer is True.

Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

A-12 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

AP Solutions for Figure 6-34, "Checkpoint (2 of 2)," on page 6-40

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 2)
IBM Power Systems
5. What happens if the minimum (or required) amount of a resource is not available
when a partition is activated?
The answer is the partition will not start.

6. How many processors is a partition allocated if, when it starts, it has a minimum of
three processors, desires five processors, and four processors are currently available
on the system?
The answer is it starts with four processors.

7. What happens if a partition is currently running with its three minimum processors but
it desires five processors and another processor becomes available after the partition
is started?
The answer is nothing.

8. What is the granularity of allocating processor resources when configuring partitions?

The answer is for dedicated processor partitions, allocations are made in units of 1.
For partitions using the shared processor pool, allocations are made in units of 0.01,
with a minimum allocation of 0.1 processing units.

9. When incrementing the amount of memory for a partition profile, the minimum unit is
how much?
The answer is it is the size of the LMB (16 MB 256 MB).
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions A-13

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Unit 7, "Partition operations"

Solutions for Figure 7-30, "Checkpoint (1 of 2)," on page 7-37

Checkpoint solutions (1 of 2)
IBM Power Systems

1. How can you stop a partition?

The answer is log in to a partition and shut down. Alternatively, use the
HMC shut down menu option or the chsysstate command.

2. What states must the managed system be in to create partitions?

The answer is standby or operating.

3. True or False: The last partition profile you create for a partition is
automatically its default profile.
The answer is False. The first one is the default.

4. When you modify a partition profile's configuration, what must you do to

apply the new configuration to an active partition?
The answer is shut down the partition and reactivate it.

5. True or False: If you delete a partition, you delete all of its partition
profiles.
The answer is True.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

A-14 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0
Student Notebook

AP Solutions for Figure 7-31, "Checkpoint (2 of 2)," on page 7-38

Checkpoint solutions (2 of 2)
IBM Power Systems

6. List at least two things you can do if a partition will not activate.
The answers include use DLPAR to free up resources, reconfigure partitions,
and use the managed system properties to determine current resource
allocations.

7. Match the partition states to their definitions.

States: Not activated, shutting down, running, not available
a. Shutting down The partition is in the process of stopping.
b. Running The partition has been successfully activated.
c. Not activated The partition is not running but is available to be activated.
d. Not available The system is in a state that prevents the partition from being
activated (such as the managed system is powered off).
The answers, in the correct order, are shutting down, running, not activated,
and not available.

8. True or False: When activating a partition, you must use the Open Terminal
Window option.
The answer is False.
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012 Appendix A. Checkpoint solutions A-15

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
Student Notebook

Unit 8, "Dynamic LPAR infrastructure"

Solutions for Figure 8-21, "Checkpoint," on page 8-22

Checkpoint solutions
IBM Power Systems

1. The upper and lower limits for dynamically adding and removing memory are
bound by what two partition configuration settings?
The answer is maximum and minimum settings in the active profile.

2. True or False: Dynamically reallocating resources on a partition does not alter

the contents of the active partition profile.
The answer is True. In addition to the DLPAR operation itself, if you want the
change to occur the next time you activate the partition, make the change in
the profile.

3. If a partitions processor or memory resource is already at its maximum

setting, and you need to add more, what do you need to do?
The answer is shut down the partition, increase the maximum setting in the
profile, and reactivate the partition.

4. What dynamic reconfiguration operations can be scheduled on the HMC?

The answer is all DLPAR operations (add, move, and remove operations for
processors, memory and I/O slots).
Copyright IBM Corporation 2012

A-16 PowerVM Virtualization I Copyright IBM Corp. 2009, 2012

Course materials may not be reproduced in whole or in part
without the prior written permission of IBM.
V7.0

backpg
Back page